JP7496670B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In the past, there was a pachinko game machine that could be set to one of multiple setting values based on a setting change operation and could control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. In such a pachinko game machine, a command indicating that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being confirmed is sent from the main board to the performance control board, and the machine is notified that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being confirmed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-200902 A

However, in Patent Document 1, sufficient consideration is not given to the situation when the setting confirmation work is performed while the game is in progress, and there is room for improvement.

The present invention has been made in response to such problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately execute control when an irregular command is received during setting confirmation state.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
a setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
an interrupt processing execution means for executing an interrupt processing capable of executing a process related to a game;
a normal variable display means for variably displaying normal identification information based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area, and deriving and displaying a display result;
a normal variable display time measuring means for measuring a normal variable display period during which the normal identification information is variably displayed;
A variable means for changing the state between a first state which is advantageous to a player and a second state which is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times in which the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a period during which the variable means is changed to the first state;
An advantageous state notification effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying the user that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
An advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification performance is executed;
An external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine;
A storage means capable of storing game information;
an initialization means for initializing the game information stored in the storage means based on an operation of an initialization operation means;
a setting permission state control means capable of controlling the setting permission state to a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the gaming machine to the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine starts and before the interrupt process is executed,
After the setting confirmation state is ended, the interrupt process is executed, and after the interrupt process is executed, the gaming machine is not controlled to the setting confirmation state until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
when power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, a game is resumed based on the game information stored in the storage means;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an ON state, the gaming information stored in the storage means is initialized;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an ON state, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting permission state,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state,
when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being timed, and thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted with the restart of the power supply;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being timed, and thereafter , when the power supply to the gaming machine is started again in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is not resumed upon resumption of the power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is resumed;
when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is being timed, and thereafter, when power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the change period is restarted with the resumption of power supply;
when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is being timed, and thereafter , when power supply to the gaming machine is started again in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the timekeeping of the change period is not resumed upon resumption of power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timekeeping of the change period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends;
when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being timed, and thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the advantageous state notification period is restarted with the resumption of the power supply;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being timed, and thereafter the power supply to the gaming machine is started again in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is not resumed upon resumption of the power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends,
the external output means is capable of outputting the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state,
The storage means includes:
The game information is stored in a predetermined area, and a specific area is stored in which setting value data indicating a setting value corresponding to an address higher than the predetermined area is stored.
A region for storing information not used in a game is provided between the predetermined region and the specific region.
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be carried out efficiently.
The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees (setting values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for determining a jackpot),
A variable display means (a microcomputer 100 for game control, a CPU 120 for performance control) capable of performing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state;
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
It is possible to control the game state into an advantageous state (big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the judgment value of the variation pattern judgment table is common regardless of the set value),
The special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) includes a first period (a period from when the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state (probability change state) until a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game games are played) and a second period after the first period (a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state and a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played without the jackpot game state being reached).
The presentation control means is capable of executing a specific presentation for notifying whether or not the advantageous state has been reached (in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot"), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a battle presentation for notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won by having a battle between an ally character and an enemy character after the reach state has been reached).
The execution rate of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the specific effect in the second period (when the fluctuation display result is "miss", as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1), the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is [10%], whereas as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the second period is [0%]).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a special state.

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time-saving state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a common presentation in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1) and (C1), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to chance time in either the case where the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) after the end of a big win game, and the case where the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state), in the first period of either game state, so that a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common letters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
A gaming machine according to the means B1 or B2,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a suggestive presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIG. 11-13 (1) and (5) to (7), in the first period [final variation] (the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special pattern becomes "big win", or the 100th special game after the variation display result of the second special pattern becomes "big win"), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (continuation of the high base state of the game state)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, interest in the game during the first period can be increased.

The gaming machine of the means B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a special state (small win gaming state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player,
The special state is a game state in which game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state (the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which small wins are likely to occur, and by controlling it to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, making it easier for game balls to win the special variable winning ball device).
A gaming machine characterized by:
This configuration can increase the excitement of playing in special situations.

The gaming machine of the means B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is advantageous to the player and different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)),
The special state can be controlled in response to a predetermined number of variable displays being executed in the predetermined state (after the end of the big win game, the state transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probability change state), and if the next big win does not occur after 100 variable displays, a continuation challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and the state transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the 101st variable display).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is advantageous to the player and different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)),
In the predetermined state, the game state is different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state advantageous to the player (after the end of the big win game, it transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probable change state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variable display until the number of small wins reaches 50, a continuation challenge performance of a successful mode is executed in the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times, and it transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the next or subsequent variable display after the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6,
The presentation control means (presentation control CPU 120) is capable of executing special presentations (first setting suggestion presentation, second setting suggestion presentation) that suggest a setting value,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variable display of the second period, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display excluding the final variable display of the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the final variable display of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, interest in the game can be increased during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special performances (first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance) as special performances suggesting a setting value,
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1050. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of the means B9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8,
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the pending display or the active display),
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means B10 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9,
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing an action performance acting on the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action performance acting on a pending display or an active display),
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect in the first period is higher than that in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10,
A determination means (CPU 103) is provided for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is to be controlled before a variable display (variable display) is executed,
The performance control means is capable of executing a notice performance based on the judgment by the judgment means (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a pre-reading notice performance that predicts the probability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending),
The execution rate of the preview performance in the first period is different from the execution rate of the preview performance in the second period (the execution rate of the pre-read preview performance is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

As shown in JP2018-47306A (FIG. 19), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to any of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and that selects a variation pattern according to the set value. In a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values as described in JP2018-47306A (FIG. 19), when the set value is high, the period required until the next jackpot occurs is short, and the gambling tendency becomes too high, making it difficult to realize healthy playability. In addition, when the set value is low, the period required until the next jackpot occurs is long, and interest is reduced. The inventions according to means A1 to A11 have been made in consideration of the above-mentioned situation, and aim to realize healthy playability and improve interest in a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values.

The gaming machine of the means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees (setting values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for determining a jackpot),
A variable display means (a microcomputer 100 for game control, a CPU 120 for performance control) capable of performing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state;
The game state control means (CPU 103)
It is possible to control the game state into an advantageous state (big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the judgment value of the variation pattern judgment table is common regardless of the set value),
The special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) includes a first period (a period from when the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state (probability change state) until a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game games are played) and a second period after the first period (a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state and a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played without the jackpot game state being reached).
In the first period, the selection rate of a variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than a predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in Figures 11-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "miss", in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the selection rate of "normal reach miss" (variable display period of 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (variable display period of 60 seconds), which is a variable display period longer than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period of 5 seconds), is higher than in the second period).
In the second period, the selection rate of a variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in Figs. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), when the display result is "miss", in the second period, the selection rate of "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (variable display period of 1 second), which is a variable display period shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (variable display period of 5 seconds), is higher than in the first period [excluding final fluctuation]).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, when the gaming state is in a special state, sound gaming characteristics can be achieved and interest in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance is provided.
The game state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time-saving state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a common presentation in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1) and (C1), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to chance time in the first period in either the case where the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) after the end of a big win game, and the case where the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state), so that a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common letters "Chance Time" are displayed at the top of the screen).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of the means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or A2,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance is provided.
The presentation control means is capable of executing a suggestive presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIG. 11-13 (1) and (5) to (7), in the first period [final variation] (the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special pattern becomes "big win", or the 100th special game after the variation display result of the second special pattern becomes "big win"), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (continuation of the high base state of the game state)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, interest in the game during the first period can be increased.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a special state (small win gaming state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player,
The special state is a game state in which game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state (the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which small wins are likely to occur, and by controlling it to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, making it easier for game balls to win the special variable winning ball device).
A gaming machine characterized by:
This configuration can increase the excitement of playing in special situations.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player,
The special state can be controlled in response to a predetermined number of variable displays being executed in the predetermined state (after the end of the big win game, the state transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probability change state), and if the next big win does not occur after 100 variable displays, a continuation challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and the state transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the 101st variable display).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player,
In the predetermined state, the game state is different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state advantageous to the player (after the end of the big win game, it transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probable change state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variable display until the number of small wins reaches 50, a continuation challenge performance of a successful mode is executed in the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times, and it transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the next or subsequent variable display after the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance is provided.
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing special performances (first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance) that suggest a setting value,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variable of the second period, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display excluding the final variable of the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the final variable of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance is provided.
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special performances (first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance) as special performances suggesting a setting value,
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1050. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, interest in the game can be increased during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance;
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display (a variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the pending display or the active display),
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means A10 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance;
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display (a variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing an action performance acting on the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action performance acting on a pending display or an active display),
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect in the first period is higher than that in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A10,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for controlling the performance;
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is to be controlled before a variable display (variable display) is executed,
The performance control means is capable of executing a notice performance based on the judgment by the judgment means (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a pre-reading notice performance that predicts the probability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending),
The execution rate of the preview performance in the first period is different from the execution rate of the preview performance in the second period (the execution rate of the pre-read preview performance is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

Also, as shown in JP2018-47306A (FIG. 19), a gaming machine has been proposed that can be set to one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and executes a presentation that suggests the setting value. With regard to gaming machines such as those described in JP2018-47306A (FIG. 19), there is room to improve the interest of the presentation regarding the suggestion of the setting. The inventions relating to means C1 to C11 have been made in consideration of the above-mentioned situation, and aim to improve the interest of the presentation regarding the suggestion of the setting.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees (setting values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for determining a jackpot),
A variable display means (a microcomputer 100 for game control, a CPU 120 for performance control) capable of performing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state;
A presentation control means (presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing special presentations related to setting suggestions (first setting suggestion presentation, second setting suggestion presentation),
The game state control means (CPU 103)
It is possible to control the game state into an advantageous state (big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state), high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the set value (as shown in FIG. 11-6, the judgment value of the variation pattern judgment table is common regardless of the set value),
The special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) includes a first period (a period from when the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state (probability change state) until a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game games are played) and a second period after the first period (a period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state and a predetermined number of special game games (50 or 100 times) are played without the jackpot game state being reached).
The selection rate of a specific variable display pattern is different between the first period and the second period (when the variable display result is “miss”, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1) and (C1), the selection rate of a variable pattern accompanied by a super reach (“super reach miss”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of a variable pattern accompanied by a super reach (“super reach miss”) in the second period).
The execution rate of the special effect is different between the first period and the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display, so the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variable of the second period, so the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display excluding the final variable of the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the final variable of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time-saving state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability change state)) and is advantageous to the player,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a common presentation in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1) and (C1), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to chance time in the first period in either the case where the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) after the end of a big win game, and the case where the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state), so that a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common letters "Chance Time" are displayed at the top of the screen).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine according to the means C1 or C2,
The presentation control means is capable of executing a suggestive presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIG. 11-13 (1) and (5) to (7), in the first period [final variation] (the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special pattern becomes "big win", or the 100th special game after the variation display result of the second special pattern becomes "big win"), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge presentation suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (continuation of the high base state of the game state)).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, interest in the game during the first period can be increased.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C3,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103) is capable of controlling the game state to a special state (small win gaming state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player,
The special state is a game state in which game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state (the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which small wins are likely to occur, and by controlling it to a low base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, making it easier for game balls to win the special variable winning ball device).
A gaming machine characterized by:
This configuration can increase the excitement of playing in special situations.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and is advantageous to the player,
The special state can be controlled in response to a predetermined number of variable displays being executed in the predetermined state (after the end of the big win game, the state transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probability change state), and if the next big win does not occur after 100 variable displays, a continuation challenge performance is executed at the 100th variable display, and the state transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the 101st variable display).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the advantageous state (big win game state) ends, the game state can be controlled to a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state)) which is advantageous to the player and different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)),
In the predetermined state, the game state is different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state advantageous to the player (after the end of the big win game, it transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probable change state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variable display until the number of small wins reaches 50, a continuation challenge performance of a successful mode is executed in the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times, and it transitions to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) from the next or subsequent variable display after the variable display where the number of small wins has occurred 50 times).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the game state is in a predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6,
The execution rate of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%. On the other hand, in the second period, since the execution or non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variable display of the second period, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display excluding the final variable display of the second period is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the final variable display of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special performances (first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance),
The type of special effect that can be executed in the first period is different from the type of special effect that can be executed in the second period (when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1050. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8,
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a change performance that changes the display mode of the pending display or the active display),
The execution rate of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the change effect in the second period (the execution rate of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means C10 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C9,
A corresponding display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to a variable display (variable display),
The performance control means is capable of executing an action performance acting on the corresponding display (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action performance acting on a pending display or an active display),
The execution rate of the action effect in the first period is different from the execution rate of the action effect in the second period (the execution rate of the action effect in the first period is higher than that in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10,
A determination means (CPU 103) is provided for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is to be controlled before a variable display (variable display) is executed,
The performance control means is capable of executing a notice performance based on the judgment by the judgment means (the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a pre-reading notice performance that predicts the probability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending),
The execution rate of the preview performance in the first period is different from the execution rate of the preview performance in the second period (the execution rate of the pre-read preview performance is higher in the first period than in the second period).
A gaming machine characterized by:
With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game during the first and second periods.

Some conventional gaming machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the setting value (see, for example, JP 2010-200902 A). The gaming machine in JP 2010-200902 A, for example, is equipped with a random number generator for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, which can generate a random number for determining within a predetermined numerical range, and determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number for determining generated by the random number generator for determining and an advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set in the gaming machine, and it is possible to vary the probability of controlling to an advantageous state by varying the number of advantageous state determination values for each setting value set in the gaming machine. However, when the number of advantageous state determination values is varied for each setting value set in the gaming machine in this way, if the advantageous state determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations as to whether the random number for determining matches the advantageous state determination value, which results in a large processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. The inventions relating to means 1 to 21 were made with a focus on these problems, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the processing load required to determine whether or not to control the machine to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state should be controlled;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a special state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the second aspect is the gaming machine of the first aspect,
A storage unit (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of identifying the setting value set by the setting unit,
The advantageous state determination means reads out the setting value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of 207SGS550 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41), and sets the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical range, as the advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination matches (for example, the part where the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table according to the setting value read out in the processing of 207SG550 in the processing of 207SG556 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous state judgment means judges whether or not to control to an advantageous state, thereby preventing an inappropriate judgment from being made due to an inappropriate advantageous state judgment value.

The gaming machine of the third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
The storage means can store the setting value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as used setting value information (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 updates and stores the setting value set in the processing of 207SGS550 as a used setting value in the processing of 207SGS566 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41).
The present invention is characterized in that it further comprises a comparison means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 compares the setting value identified in the processing of 207SGS550 with the judgment used setting value in the processing of 207SGS552 shown in Figure 8-41) that can compare at predetermined intervals whether the setting value information stored in the memory means is identical to the judgment used setting value information stored in the immediately preceding judgment by the advantageous state judgment means.
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous state judgment value has been set due to inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The collation means performs collation as the predetermined period each time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, a part that executes the process of 207SGS552 each time the CPU 103 executes variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a comparison is performed each time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state, so that it is possible to more accurately identify whether an inappropriate advantageous state determination value has been set.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 3 or 4,
It is characterized by having an error notification means capable of executing an error notification that the setting value information is abnormal when the comparison result of the comparison means is not identical (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes an error notification process (207SGS439) to display a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine aware that the setting value information is abnormal, and the abnormal setting value information can be dealt with quickly.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect is the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect,
The game control means controls the game to an unplayable state in which the game is not possible when the collation result of the collation means indicates that the game is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the setting value information is abnormal to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the setting value and the used setting value do not match as a comparison result of 207SGS552, a part that transitions to a loop process and a part that executes the process of 207SGS554 to send an error designation command to the performance control board 12).
The error notification means is capable of executing the error notification based on the error notification information being output by the game control means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103 in the error notification process (207SGS439), and executes an error notification according to the received error designation command when an error designation command has been received).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to a judgment based on inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control the display to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-41, a part that determines the variable display result using a variable display result determination module each time the CPU 103 executes the variable display);
A reserve memory means for storing the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generating means as a reserve memory when the execution condition for the variable display is satisfied (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process of 207SGS510 in the start winning determination process in FIG. 8-39);
A pre-determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-40) capable of determining in advance whether or not it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state based on a reserved memory before the determination by the advantageous state determination means;
Further comprising:
The advance judgment means performs the advance judgment by executing a process common to the process for the advantageous state judgment means to judge whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 judges the variable display result using a variable display result judgment module even in the random number value judgment process at the time of winning).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, thereby reducing the processing load.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to a player than the advantageous state,
A storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of identifying the setting value set by the setting means;
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
Further comprising:
The game control means is capable of controlling to the special state based on the fact that it is determined by the special state determination means that the game is to be controlled to the special state (for example, a part that updates the value of the special chart process flag to 8 "based on the fact that the variable display result is a small win, and controls to a small win game state),
The special state determination value is set to the same number in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range so as to be a continuous common numerical range from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value).
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, and reads out the setting value information stored in the storage means each time the determination is made, and sets the special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the setting value, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the setting value, but the CPU 103 always reads out the setting value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, sets the display result determination table according to the read setting value, and determines whether or not the variable display result is a small hit).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state can be reduced, and when the advantageous state determination means sets an advantageous state determination value corresponding to a setting value identified from the setting value information, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting values identified from the setting value information can be standardized, thereby reducing the capacity of the processing program.

The gaming machine of the ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
For the setting value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, for the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control it to an advantageous state by targeting only the common numerical range among the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control it to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the tenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value that have different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state should be controlled;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is in a normal state or a special state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.
Furthermore, for example, if the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state once based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
a game control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that control to the advantageous state, and the probability of determining that control to the advantageous state is a normal state corresponding to a normal number which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value, or a special state corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased from the normal number based on the advantageous state being reached;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state, in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.
Furthermore, for example, if the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state once based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to an advantageous state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value becomes a predetermined reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means can determine whether to control to an advantageous state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is normal or special, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol), and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value that have different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can be controlled to the advantageous state when it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state, and can be controlled to the special state when it is determined by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit determination values).
The special state determination means, when executing the variable display of the first identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value).
The numbers of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, but are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the common second reference value (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, when the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and when the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit determination value regardless of the variable special pattern is set to the common value 32767 as the small hit reference value).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, for example, if the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to execute multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state judgment means only needs to execute a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to a special state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value, so the special state judgment means can determine whether to control to a special state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the second reference value depending on the variation special diagram, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is favorable to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the favorable state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value that have different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state and can control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
The special state determination value is set to the same number regardless of the set value set by the setting means so that the special state determination value is a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value that is different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the small win is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small win reference value if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small win reference value if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, in a range different from the numerical range of the big win determination value when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, which changes depending on the set value, the numerical range of the special state judgment value can always be specified within the same range depending on the set value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, for example, if the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to execute multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state judgment means only needs to execute a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to a special state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the special state judgment values. However, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value, so that the special state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment once as to whether or not to control to a favorable state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and the common numerical range of the special state judgment values, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 14 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is favorable to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the favorable state,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set a setting value to one of a plurality of levels including an advantageous determination value and an unfavorable determination value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a value ranging from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
a game control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that control to the advantageous state, capable of controlling to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that control to the special state, and capable of controlling to a normal state (e.g., normal state or time-saving state) corresponding to a normal number which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value, or a special state (e.g., a probability-changing state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the advantageous state being entered;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state).
The special state determination value is set to the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means and whether the state is the normal state or the special state, so that the special state determination value is a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value that is different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small win determination value is the numerical range of the big win determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1). In a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is normal, time-saving, or special probability state, the continuous numerical range is always set to 32767 as the small win reference value and the continuous numerical range is always set to 3267 to 33094 as the small win reference value, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is normal, time-saving, or special probability state, the continuous numerical range is always set to 3267 to 33421 as the small win reference value.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, which changes depending on the set value, the special state judgment means can always specify the numerical range of the special state judgment value within the same range depending on the set value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change depending on the set value that is set, the special state judgment means only needs to specify the same numerical range as the numerical range of the special state judgment value regardless of the set value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, for example, if the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to execute multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state judgment means only needs to execute a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, for example, if the second common numerical range of the special state judgment value is set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to a special state based on the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means and each numerical range of the special state judgment value. Meanwhile, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state judgment value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value, so that the special state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment once as to whether or not to control to a favorable state based on the judgment random value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the second common numerical range of the special state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 15 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values and unfavorable setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a value ranging from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player);
A random number generating means (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state should be controlled;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1020 to 1237) common to the plurality of stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value (a value of 2 to 6 excluding 1)),
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-55 and 8-56, the range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-55 and Fig. 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the reference value is 60000, and the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state can be made different for each setting value by simply changing only the non-common numerical range, so that the development load of the gaming machine regarding the setting value can be reduced. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, so that even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the non-common numerical range increases according to the setting value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value do not overlap, so that the development load of the gaming machine regarding the setting value can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of means 16 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
A random number generating means (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state should be controlled;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
As the advantageous state determination value, within a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical range different from each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values from 1 to 6)) are set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-55 and 8-56, the range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-55 and Fig. 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the reference value is 60000, and the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state can be made different for each set value by simply changing only the non-common numerical range, so that the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be reduced. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, or the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and is set to a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, so that even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the non-common numerical range increases according to the set value, the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the non-common numerical range do not overlap, so that the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of means 17 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is favorable to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the favorable state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set a setting value to one of multiple levels including advantageous setting values and unfavorable setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state and can control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set to at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to each set value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The special state determination value is set to the same number within a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in Figures 8-53 and 8-54, the numerical range of the small win determination value is set to a numerical range including 328 determination values in succession within the numerical range of the big win determination value, regardless of the set value).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In particular, in the present invention, the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value and the numerical range of the special state judgment value are set continuously, so that when determining whether to control to an advantageous state or a special state based on whether the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value or the special state judgment value (whether it is a value within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or whether it is a value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), it is possible to determine at once whether to control to an advantageous state or a special state by determining whether the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means is a value between the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or whether the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means is a value between the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, and therefore it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to an advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 18 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol), and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value that have different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state and can control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value that is different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value),
The special state determination means, when executing the variable display of the first identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value).
The number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, but are set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value at the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to a numerical range of 32767 to 33094 when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and to a numerical range of 32767 to 33421 when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the probability variable state when the setting value is set to 6 in the pachinko game machine 1, with 32767 as the small hit reference value).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, which changes depending on the set value, the special state judgment means can always specify the numerical range of the special state judgment value within the same range depending on the set value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, for example, if the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment once as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to a special state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the special state judgment values. However, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value, so that the special state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment once as to whether or not to control to a favorable state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and the common numerical range of the special state judgment values, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to an advantageous state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value becomes the first reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means can determine whether to control to an advantageous state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the first reference value depending on whether the state is normal or special, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to an advantageous state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to a special state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value, so the special state judgment means can determine whether to control to a special state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the second reference value depending on the special fluctuation diagram, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 19 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 18,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol), and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set a setting value to one of multiple levels including advantageous setting values and unfavorable setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player);
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
a game control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) capable of controlling to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that control to the advantageous state, capable of controlling to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that control to the special state, and capable of controlling to a normal state (e.g., normal state or time-saving state) corresponding to a normal number which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value, or a special state (e.g., a probability-changing state) corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased from the normal number based on the advantageous state being entered;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the common numerical range and a non-common numerical range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value);
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range, with 1020 being the jackpot reference value).
As the special state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is set as the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value).
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 and 8-18, the numerical range of the jackpot is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value, regardless of whether the state is the normal state or the special state).
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the setting value set by the setting means and whether the state is the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small win determination value is a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big win determination value when the setting value is set to 6 in the pachinko game machine 1, and if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value or the game state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small win reference value, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value or the game state is the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small win reference value).
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small win is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small win reference value regardless of the set value if the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, and is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small win reference value regardless of the set value if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern).
The special state determination means, when executing the variable display of the first identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 and 8-18, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, determines whether or not to control to the special state with a second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-19 and 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, a portion that determines whether or not to control to the small win game state with 655 determination values included in the numerical range of the small win determination value).
The number of the first special state determination value and the second special state determination value are different, but are set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the setting value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so as to be a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to a numerical range of 32767 to 33094 when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and set to a numerical range of 32767 to 33421 when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the probability variable state when the setting value is set to 6 in the pachinko game machine 1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state, and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, which changes depending on the set value that is set, the special state judgment means can always specify the numerical range of the special state judgment value within the same range depending on the set value that is set, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
Furthermore, for example, if the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to execute multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. However, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value, so that the advantageous state judgment means only needs to execute a judgment as to whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number value generation means and a continuous numerical range including the first common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Furthermore, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set across multiple numerical ranges, it is necessary to perform multiple judgments as to whether or not to control to a special state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and each numerical range of the special state judgment values. However, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state judgment values is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value, so that the special state judgment means only needs to perform a judgment once as to whether or not to control to a favorable state based on the judgment random number values generated by the judgment random number value generation means and the common numerical range of the special state judgment values, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to a special state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to an advantageous state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the advantageous state judgment value becomes a predetermined reference value, so the advantageous state judgment means can determine whether to control to an advantageous state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is normal or special, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to an advantageous state.
In addition, for example, when determining whether to control to a special state based on whether the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value (whether the random number value for judgment is a value within the numerical range of the special state judgment value), one of the minimum and maximum values of the special state judgment value becomes the second reference value, so the special state judgment means can determine whether to control to a special state by simply identifying the value between the minimum and maximum values that is not the second reference value depending on the variation special diagram, thereby reducing the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of the 20th means is a gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th means,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is favorable to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the favorable state,
A setting means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) that can set one of a plurality of setting values (e.g., a value from 1, which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player, to 6, which is the most favorable setting value for the player) including at least an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value that have different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state and can be controlled to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
The advantageous state determination value is set, within a predetermined numerical range, to at least a first common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) that is common to the multiple stages of setting values that can be set by the setting means;
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is set in a predetermined numerical range, including the first common numerical range and a non-common numerical range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of a jackpot determination value ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value (a value of 2 to 6 excluding 1)),
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020, which is the jackpot reference value, to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-55 and 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the reference value is 60000, and the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value).
The special state determination value is set to the same number in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value so as to be a second common numerical range continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value and the specific reference value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big win determination value, if the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, the numerical range is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094, and if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the numerical range is always set to the range of 3267 to 33421, regardless of the set value set).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In particular, in the present invention, since the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state is always determined based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced, and the amount of data related to the processing for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 21 is a gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a big win gaming state) that is favorable to a player and a special state (e.g., a small win gaming state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the favorable state,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state;
A random number generating means (for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a random number for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state and whether or not to control to the special state;
A means for determining whether or not to control the game to the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 8-41);
A special state determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 8-41) for determining whether or not to control to the special state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means;
A game control means (e.g., a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5 ) that can control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means that the game should be controlled to the advantageous state and can control to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means that the game should be controlled to the special state;
Equipped with
The number of advantageous state determination values varies depending on the setting value, so that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state varies (for example, as shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-20, the number of jackpot determination values varies depending on the setting value set, so that the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state varies),
As the advantageous state determination value, within a predetermined numerical range, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical range different to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values ranging from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values from 1 to 6)) are set,
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, when the set value is 2, the range from 1020, which is the jackpot reference value, to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range).
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-55 and 8-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the reference value is 60000, and the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value).
The special state determination value is set to the same number so as to be a continuous common numerical range from the first reference value and a second reference value different from the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, in a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big win determination value, if the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, the numerical range is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094, and if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the numerical range is always set to the range of 3267 to 33421, regardless of the set value set).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In particular, in the present invention, since the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state is always determined based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced, and the amount of data related to the processing for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game information display unit. A figure showing the appearance of each type of jackpot in a special pattern display device. A figure showing the shifting manner of the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator. A diagram showing the appearance of each type of jackpot on the round display. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the first special chart in the normal state or the time-saving state. This figure shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the first special chart in the special probability state. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the second special chart in the normal state or the time-saving state. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the second special chart in the special hit state. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (for jackpot A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. An explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of start winning. 1A is a front view of a display monitor, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and FIG. 1C is an explanatory diagram of the display contents. 4 is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on a display monitor. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams illustrating changes in the display content of a display monitor. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process. 1A is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power interruption detection process. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing changes in the display mode of a display monitor. FIG. 1A shows the display state of the display monitor during a cold start, and FIG. 1B shows the display state of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when power is restored after a power outage during a setting change. (A) is a diagram showing the changes in the display state of the special pattern display device, the hold display device, the right hit lamp, and the round display device while the setting change process is being executed, and (B) shows the changes in the display state of the special pattern display device when an abnormal setting value error occurs or when power is restored after a power outage during a setting change. A diagram showing a part of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining random numbers when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display result determination module. 13 is a flowchart showing a main processing for performance control. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a state in which the information is cleared. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the initial design for each received command. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the notification mode when a pachinko game machine is started up. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of operation of non-detection time operation control and actual operation check operation control; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the operation speed in the non-detection operation control and the operation control for checking actual operation. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the timing of changing the setting value and finishing checking the setting value and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a power interruption detection process. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of the performance control process. A diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modified example. A diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modified example. A diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modified example. A diagram showing the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process in the characteristic portion 10F. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process in the characteristic portion 10F. 13 is a flowchart showing the game stop initiation processing in characteristic section 10F. 13 is a flowchart showing the game stop end processing in characteristic section 10F. A figure showing examples of performance control commands in feature section 40F. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing for performance control in characteristic section 40F. 13 is a flowchart showing the sub-side game stop processing in characteristic section 40F. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a low probability state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referenced in a high probability state. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for a first special pattern, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for a second special pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of pending display and active display in a low probability/low base state, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of pending display and active display in a low probability/high base state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of pending display and active display in a high probability/high base state. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow for each presentation mode. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in the first period [excluding final fluctuation], (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in the first period [final fluctuation], and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table referenced in the second period. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of various effects after the end of the special chart 1 jackpot game state. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of various effects after the end of the Special Chart 2 jackpot game state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation at the start of fluctuation. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for whether or not to execute the cut-in preview effect, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first setting suggestion presentation in the first period, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first setting suggestion presentation in the second period. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the second setting suggestion presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a continuation challenge presentation. FIG.

(Basic explanation)

First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine).

(Configuration of pachinko game machine 1, etc.)

Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched from a specified ball launching device and hit into this gaming area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)

The game ball is launched into the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, they may also be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in FIG. 2. In addition, various boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, and a power supply board.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)

Next, we will explain the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Main operations of main board 11)

First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)

Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 back to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win during performance processing. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variations of the basic explanation)

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment)

Next, the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment will be described. Figure 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main components. As shown in Figures 8-1 and 8-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are launched and hit into this gaming area from a specified ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is provided with a glass door frame 207SG003a with a glass window that can rotate around the left side between a door open position that opens the front of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front. The glass door frame 207SG003a allows the gaming area to be opened and closed, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

The gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by an amusement center employee or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it, and players or the like other than the employee cannot open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass door frame 207SG003a.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set in two places, one on the left and one on the right, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display is performed that identifiably displays a variable display of the reserved memory number (special reserved memory number) corresponding to the special game. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed into a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed into a right game area 207SG002R where game balls can flow down.

The left play area 207SG002L is a play area where game balls that are hit relatively weakly (left hit) by operating the ball hitting operation handle 30 flow down, and the right play area 207SG002R is a play area where game balls that are hit more strongly (right hit) by operating the ball hitting operation handle 30 than the game balls that flow down the left play area 207SG002L flow down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

In addition, a general winning port 10 is arranged in the left play area 207SG002L, and a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general winning port 10, and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged in the right play area 207SG002R from the upstream to downstream side of the right play area 207SG002R. In other words, a game ball flowing down the left play area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first start winning port formed by the general winning port 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right play area 207SG002R can win a prize in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, multiple obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in Fig. 8-2 and Fig. 8-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where it is housed in a board case 207SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 is also provided with a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value change state in which the setting value can be changed, a setting change switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is also a state (setting value confirmation state) in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the game parlor, etc., as will be described in detail later.

The setting switch main body, which is provided with the operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed on the rear side of the board case 207SG201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 207SG201.

The board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 using a specified door key. The lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk at the game arcade, so it can only be operated by a store clerk who has the setting key. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can perform the ON/OFF switching operation described later using the setting key. Note that, although the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, they may be combined into one key.

The board case 207SG201 is also provided with a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is provided on the top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is provided in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not open, so the front of the main board 11 is the front of the game board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open and the back side of the game board 2 is viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front of the main board 11 may be the same as the front of the pachinko game machine 1.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, there are a first special pattern display device 207SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 207SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved display device 207SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved display device 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 207SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved memory The game information display unit 207SG200 is equipped with a normal reserve indicator 207SG025C that can display the number of rounds, a round indicator 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, a right hit lamp 207SG132 that lights up in a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area 207SG002R, such as a high base state (time-saving state) or a jackpot game state, a probability change lamp 207SG133 that lights up when in a probability change state, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time-saving state).

As shown in Figures 8-3 and 8-4, the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B, if the variable display result of the special pattern is a miss or a small win, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination.

When the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot, the first special pattern display device 207SG004A can display the variable display result and derived result with two types of jackpot patterns (combinations of lit LEDs) for each type of jackpot. Also, when the variable display result of the second special pattern is a jackpot, the second special pattern display device 207SG004B can display the variable display result and derived result with two types of jackpot patterns (combinations of lit LEDs) for each type of jackpot.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot patterns that can be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B are all different, but the jackpot patterns that can be derived and displayed by the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the jackpot patterns that can be derived and displayed by the second special pattern display device 207SG004B may at least partially overlap.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four-segment LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if there is one hold memory, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the hold memory number increases, the second from the left, the third from the left, and the fourth from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time a variable display is executed, the hold memory decreases (is consumed), and the LED on the hold indicator corresponding to that variable display goes out in a specified shift direction (leftward in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment).

In the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory exist, the variable display based on the second special chart reserved memory is executed with priority. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special chart reserved memory and two second special chart reserved memories (when only the leftmost LED of the first reserved indicator 207SG025A is lit and the two leftmost LEDs of the second reserved indicator 207SG25B are lit), the variable display based on the first special chart reserved memory is executed after the second special chart reserved memory becomes 0 due to the execution of the variable display based on the second special chart reserved memory.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, the feature part 207SG of this embodiment has three types of jackpots: jackpot A, which is a five-round jackpot, jackpot B, which is a ten-round jackpot, and jackpot C, which is a fifteen-round jackpot. Depending on the jackpot type, which of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 will light up varies.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a performance control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The performance control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs.

In addition, the performance control board 12 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is connected to the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, which can move between their respective origin positions and performance positions during variable display, etc., an origin detection sensor 207SG331 that can detect that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and an origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect that the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322.

Figure 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in feature unit 207SG in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 8-8(A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-8(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big win", or "minor win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", for example, as shown in Figure 8-8 (B).

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8(B), in the variable display result notification command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred. The error (abnormality) designation command, for example, sets EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), making it possible to identify which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the performance control board 12 side, and the occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process described below.

Command A0XXH is a start of win command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A3XXH is an end of win command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a big win game state or a small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or small win game state (for example, "1" to "15").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A that has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B that has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in an identifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in an identifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition is satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition is satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, and the type of jackpot (probable hit, non-probable hit, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the random number value MR3 for judging the variable pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120). Command E101H is a hot start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of RAM 102 (power outage recovery, also called a hot start). Command E102H is a cold start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of RAM 102 (cold start). Command E103H is a setting value change start notification command that notifies that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in a setting value change state). Command E104H is a setting value change end notification command that notifies that a setting value change operation has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command E105H is a setting value check start notification command that notifies that the setting value check operation has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value check state). Command E106H is a setting value change end notification command that notifies that the setting value check operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is configured with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores game control programs and fixed data, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes game control programs and performs control operations, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 that can output time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 also performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, a variable data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a transmitting operation in which the CPU 103 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105.

Figure 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 8-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11 side. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in Figures 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figures 8-10 show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance for the case where the variable display result is a "small hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Note that in this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach. Also, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ ... in addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

As shown in Figures 8-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment is set to be shorter than that of the super reach change patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β. Also, with regard to the special chart change time of the super reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the super reach such as Super Reach α and Super Reach β is executed in this embodiment, the special chart change time of the change pattern in which the super reach performance of Super Reach β is executed is set to be longer than that of the change pattern in which the super reach performance of Super Reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of Super Reach β, Super Reach α, and Normal Reach in order of increasing jackpot expectation, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In addition, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-10, an example is shown in which the change contents (presentation contents) are predetermined for each change pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change contents (presentation contents) may be different even for the same change pattern depending on the set value. For example, in the case of a normal reach miss change pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the change pattern will be a normal reach miss, if the set value is 2, the change pattern will be a pseudo consecutive performance executed twice and a non-reach miss, if the set value is 3, the change pattern will be a pseudo consecutive performance executed three times and a super reach miss, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in Figures 8-11 to 8-24, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that are the variation modes of each pattern in a variable display such as a special pattern or a normal pattern.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, the display result judgment table for the first special drawing (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the display result judgment table for the second special drawing (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), the display result judgment table for the first special drawing (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display result judgment table for the second special drawing (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-12 (B), the display result judgment table for the first special drawing (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), the display result judgment table for the second special drawing (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), the display result judgment table for the first special drawing (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), the display result judgment table for the second special drawing (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 15(A) shows the first special pattern display result judgment table (set value 5), the second special pattern display result judgment table (set value 5) shown in FIG. 8-15(B) shows the first special pattern display result judgment table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-16(A) shows the second special pattern display result judgment table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-16(B) shows the big win type judgment table (for the first special pattern) shown in FIG. 8-21(A) shows the big win type judgment table (for the second special pattern) shown in FIG. 8-21(B) shows the big win fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small win fluctuation pattern judgment table, the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal pattern display result judgment table (not shown), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes according to the setting value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability of a jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, the setting value is the highest value, 6, which is the most disadvantageous value for the game center, and the setting value is the most advantageous value for the game center as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

Figures 8-11 (A) to 8-16 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result judgment tables corresponding to each set value. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, separate display result judgment tables are used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common display result judgment table may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

As shown in FIG. 8-11(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-11(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-12(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-13(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-13(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-14(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the values can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-14(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability change state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-15(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-15(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability change state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-16(A), in the first special chart display result judgment table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special chart is the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-16(B), in the second special chart display result judgment table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special chart is the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the aforementioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in a special probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/120 when the setting value is 5, and 1/100 when the setting value is 6) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when in the normal state or the time-saving state (low probability state) (in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result judgment table, a judgment value is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 8-11 to 8-16, the multiplication factor of the probability of a jackpot in the special state relative to the probability of a jackpot in the normal state or the time-saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplication factor of the probability of a jackpot in the special state relative to the probability of a jackpot in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, if the setting value is 2, the multiplication factor of the probability of a jackpot in the special state relative to the probability of a jackpot in the normal state or the time-saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplication factor of the probability of a jackpot in the special state relative to the probability of a jackpot in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the probability of a jackpot in the special state relative to the probability of a jackpot in the normal state or the time-saving state at each setting value may all be set to a constant (for example, 5 times).

In addition, in each first special symbol display result judgment table, a judgment value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state or the set value. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-11 (A), 8-12 (A), 8-13 (A), 8-14 (A), 8-15 (A), and 8-16 (A), in the first special symbol display result judgment table, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit gaming state is set to 1/200 regardless of the gaming state or the set value.

On the other hand, in each second special symbol display result judgment table, a judgment value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special symbol display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the set value. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-11 (B), 8-12 (B), 8-13 (B), 8-14 (B), 8-15 (B), and 8-16 (B), in the second special symbol display result judgment table, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is set to 1/100, regardless of the game state or the set value.

The characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a form in which the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment illustrates a form in which the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is different depending on the variable special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpots" and "minor hits" in each display result determination table, as shown in Figure 8-17, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In addition, in the first special display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging a small hit regardless of the setting value. If we look at the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the large hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the large hit judgment value for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-18, in the display result judgment table for the first special chart when the game state is in the high probability state, the range of the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In addition, in the first special display result judgment table when the game state is in a probability variable state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value, just like the first special display result judgment table when the game state is in a normal state or a time-saving state. If we focus on the case where the set value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1674 as the numerical range of the large hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is set to a range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the large hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, so that the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 8-19, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In addition, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging a small hit regardless of the setting value. If we look at the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the large hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the large hit judgment value for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is in the high probability state, the range of the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result judgment table for FIG. 2 when the game state is in the high probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In addition, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is in a probability change state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value, just like the second special display result judgment table when the game state is in a normal state or a time-saving state. If we focus on the case where the set value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1674 as the numerical range of the large hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the large hit judgment value for the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), so that the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 as the base is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is set as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to determine the variable display result.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special chart is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). Also, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special chart is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special chart is 655, which is about twice as many), while the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special chart display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is the lowest, and the judgment value is assigned so that the larger the setting value, the higher the probability that the special chart display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > setting value 2 > setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit judgment values corresponding to a big hit, it decides to make the special symbol a big hit (Big Hit A to Big Hit C). Also, when MR1 matches any of the hit judgment values corresponding to a small hit, it decides to make the special symbol a small hit. That is, it decides whether to win a big hit or a small hit with a probability according to the setting value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) and FIG. 8-16 (B) indicates the probability (probability) of a big hit and the probability (probability) of a small hit. Also, deciding whether to make a big hit or not means deciding whether to control to a big hit game state, but also means deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B a big hit pattern. Also, deciding whether or not to make it a small win means deciding whether or not to control the game to a small win game state, but also deciding whether or not to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B a small win pattern.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values, 1 to 6, are set as the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more.

Figures 8-21 (A) and 8-21 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 8-21 (A) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 8-21 (B) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

The jackpot types in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-22. In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot types are set as follows: jackpot A (also called a non-variable jackpot), in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low-probability, high-base state; and jackpot B or jackpot C (also called a variable jackpot), in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game ends, transitioning to a high-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated fifteen times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player.

The time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "jackpot A" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

On the other hand, the high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B or jackpot C continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 is assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "2", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 229 is assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "3", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 209 is assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 0 to 299 judged value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 189 is assigned to jackpot B, and 190 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0 to 299 judged value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 169 is assigned to jackpot B, and 170 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 0 to 299 judged value of MR2, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 149 is assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in a special game with the first special symbol, the rate at which jackpot A, in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot play ends, is the same, while the rate at which jackpot C, in which both time-saving control and probability-changing control are executed after the jackpot play ends, is determined decreases for the setting values of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the highest ball payout rate is achieved when the setting value set on the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the ball payout rate decreases as the setting value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 is assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "2", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 179 is assigned to jackpot B, and 180 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "3", of the range of MR2's determination value from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 159 is assigned to jackpot B, and 160 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "4", out of the range of 0-299 for MR2's judgment value, 0-99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100-139 is assigned to jackpot B, and 140-299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "5", out of the range of 0-299 for MR2's judgment value, 0-99 is assigned to jackpot A, 100-119 is assigned to jackpot B, and 120-299 is assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the setting value is "6", out of the range of 0-299 for MR2's judgment value, 0-99 is assigned to jackpot A, and 100-299 is assigned to jackpot C (no judgment value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a jackpot occurs in a special game with the second special symbol, the rate at which jackpot A, in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot play ends, is the same, while the rate at which jackpot C, in which both time-saving control and probability-changing control are executed after the jackpot play ends, is determined decreases for the set values of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, respectively. In other words, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the highest ball payout rate is achieved when the set value set on the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the smaller the set value is, in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is not determined to be jackpot B, which is an example. In other words, the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, including not determining any jackpot type (the determination rate is 0%), but even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B.

In this way, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, the probability of determining the type of jackpot when the variable display result is a jackpot varies depending on the set value, which can increase interest in the game.

In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment illustrates an example in which the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (such as increasing the probability of a jackpot, or making it easier to determine a jackpot type C), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to make it so that the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the gameplay itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gameplay may change according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). Furthermore, when the setting value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6).

Furthermore, in this way, when the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

Specifically, the following fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is pre-determined that the variable display result will be a "jackpot," a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is pre-determined that the variable display result will be a "minor hit," and a miss fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is pre-determined that the variable display result will be a "miss."

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value for each of the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in Figures 8-23(A) and 8-23(B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table is prepared in advance. The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A) is used when the jackpot type is jackpot A, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) is used when the jackpot type is jackpot B, jackpot C. In these jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and (for jackpot B, jackpot C), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value for each of the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-23(A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot A), when the setting value is "1", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the setting value is "2", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 381 to 835 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 361 to 820 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 341 to 805 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the setting value is "5", of the range of MR3's judgment value 1 to 997, 1 to 320 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 321 to 790 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the setting value is "6", of the range of MR3's judgment value 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 301 to 775 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in Figure 8-23 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is "1", of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 181 to 510 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 161 to 470 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 141 to 430 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 121 to 390 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 100 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when jackpot A is won in the special game, the probability of determining the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is higher than the probability of determining the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), and the set values are set to decrease in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the probability of determining the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) is higher than the probability of determining the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and the set values are set to decrease in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

In other words, in this embodiment, these judgment values are assigned so that when the type of jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C," it is more likely that a Super Reach β will be determined, and when the type of jackpot is "jackpot A," it is more likely that a Super Reach α will be determined. This increases the player's anticipation that a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" will be determined when the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is executed.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit (PC1-1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23(C), in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, regardless of whether the setting value is 1 to 6, 0 to 997 out of the range of 0 to 997 for MR3 is assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Note that, although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit fluctuation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more fluctuation patterns may be provided as the small hit fluctuation pattern, and the small hit fluctuation pattern may be determined from the multiple fluctuation patterns in different proportions with the setting values 1 to 6.

In addition, the following tables are prepared in advance for the loss fluctuation pattern determination table: loss fluctuation pattern determination table A, which is used when the game state is a low base state in which time-saving control is not being implemented and the number of reserved memories is 1 or less; loss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state; loss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state; and loss fluctuation pattern determination table D, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being implemented.

In the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, predetermined random number values within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern are assigned as judgment values for the fluctuation pattern of a non-reach miss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach miss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of a super reach α miss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern of a super reach β miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 8-24 (A), in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A (for a combined pending memory count of 1 or less during a low base), when the setting value is "1", of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "2", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 431 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 411 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 391 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "5", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 371 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, predetermined random number values within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned as judgment values for the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3), which correspond to a total reserved memory count of 2 to 4.

As shown in Figure 8-24 (B), in miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B (for a combined reserved memory count of 2 to 4 during low base), when the setting value is "1", of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "2", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 481 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the MR3 judgment value range 0 to 997, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 461 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 441 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "5", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 421 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, predetermined random number values within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are assigned as judgment values for the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3), which correspond to a total number of reserved memories of 5 to 8.

As shown in Figure 8-24 (C), in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C (for a combined pending memory count of 5 or more during a low base), when the setting value is "1", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "2", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 531 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 511 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 491 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "5", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 471 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment is assigned as a judgment value for the corresponding shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) during time-saving control.

As shown in Figure 8-24 (D), in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D (for high base medium), when the setting value is "1", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "2", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 531 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "3", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 511 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "4", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 491 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "5", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 471 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set to be lower in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, among the determination values, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern, respectively. In other words, when the variable display result is a miss, the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced by not executing the variable display according to the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the Super Reach α miss fluctuation pattern and the determination ratio of the Super Reach β miss fluctuation pattern as the miss fluctuation pattern are exemplified as being completely identical between each set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the Super Reach α miss fluctuation pattern and the determination ratio of the Super Reach β miss fluctuation pattern may differ slightly (for example, about 1%) between each set value.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the super reach fluctuation pattern is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value, or only the determination ratio of either the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, an example is given in which the determination ratio of the Super Reach α miss fluctuation pattern and the determination ratio of the Super Reach β miss fluctuation pattern are both the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of only one of the determination ratios of the Super Reach α miss fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach β miss fluctuation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, both the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach α miss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach β miss are the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a jackpot, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, an example is given in which the determination ratio of the non-reach and normal reach fluctuation patterns differs depending on the set value, but depending on the set value, there may be one or more fluctuation patterns that are not determined among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differing depending on the set value includes not determining any fluctuation pattern (determination ratio is 0%) and determining a specific fluctuation pattern at a ratio of 100%.

The non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter fluctuation time than the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that reserved memories are easily consumed, and a start winning is performed when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4, making it difficult for a wasteful start winning to occur without reserved memories, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time without shortening (PA1-1) is determined, so that the time of the variable display is longer, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-24 (A) to 8-24 (C), an example is shown in which a variation pattern is determined using a different miss variation pattern determination table depending on the total number of reserved memories, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern may be determined using a different miss variation pattern determination table depending on the number of reserved memories in the special pattern to be changed (for example, the number of reserved memories of the first special pattern when executing a variable display of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern when executing a variable display of the second special pattern).

In addition, in each of the loss variation pattern determination tables of the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, the range of random numbers assigned to the Super Reach Loss variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is any value from 1 to 6. However, since the probability of a big hit and the probability of a loss differ depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the Super Reach Loss variation pattern (the occurrence rate of the Super Reach Loss variation pattern) differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the Super Reach Loss variation pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display may be executed in the Super Reach Loss variation pattern at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, taking into account the probability of a big hit and the probability of a loss for each setting value.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be preserved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. 8-25 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 207SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 207SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 207SG151C, a game control flag setting section 207SG152, a game control timer setting section 207SG153, a game control counter setting section 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 207SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 207SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 207SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 207SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 207SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 207SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 207SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 207SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 207SG190 as shown in Figure 8-26(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 207SG190 shown in Figure 8-26(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 207SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 207SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 207SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 207SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 207SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 207SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 207SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol during the variable display. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 207SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol during the variable display. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 207SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the display of the changes in the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the performance pattern change stop process that is executed when the display of the changes ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning time reception command buffer 207SG194A in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a reserved display flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reserved memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

In addition, if the execution of the hold display notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U. If the execution of the hold display notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)). A hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 207SG005D and the second hold memory display area 207SG005U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 207SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 207SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the display of the change in the performance pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 8-26(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the last completed change in the display (entry corresponding to buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the starting change in the display (entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entry after the reserved memory of the starting change in the display are shifted. For example, when the display of the change in the performance pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-26(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is being displayed at that time.

In the advance notice setting process in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, and if there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, it determines whether or not to execute the hold display notice performance and the display mode (display pattern) of the hold memory display according to whether or not the hold display notice performance is executed based on the design designation command and variable category command stored corresponding to the entry. If it is decided to execute the hold display notice performance, the hold memory display mode is decided from a square (◇) and a star (☆), and if it is decided not to execute the hold display notice performance, the display mode of the hold memory display is decided to be a white circle. Then, a value according to the display mode of the hold memory display decided is set to the hold display flag.

After the hold display flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 executes the hold display update process (see Figure 8-52), causing the hold memory display to be displayed in the first hold memory display area 207SG005D and the second hold memory display area 207SG005U.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a hold display preview effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect whose execution can be determined in the pre-reading preview setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading preview effect may be, for example, a background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, or an action effect in which a movable body provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 moves, other than the hold display preview effect.

Next, we will explain the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8-27(A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG029E are each configured with a seven-segment display made up of seven segments forming the figure "8," and a dot located at the lower right side of the seven-segment display. These first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to change these colors in an extremely short cycle to display different colors or a so-called rainbow.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is performed using the non-test areas of the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in Fig. 8-27(B) and Fig. 8-27(C), the display monitor 207SG029 can display Base L, which is the base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in all game states, Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for the first 6000 outs in all game states, Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in the second game states, and Base 3, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in the third game states, as shown in Fig. 8-27(B) and Fig. 8-27(C). Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as percentages.

When actually displaying base L on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A to display "bL.", which is the abbreviation for base L, and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A to display "b1.", which is the abbreviation for base, and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display the abbreviation "b2." for the base, and the top two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B to display the abbreviation "b3." for the base, and the top two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029 is controlled by the main board 11 (CPU 103) to sequentially display base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 controls the display of the display monitor 207SG029 to switch at 5-second intervals in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3. The display colors of the base values on the display monitor 207SG029 differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "5", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a store attendant or the like at the gaming facility can identify the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 simply by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change process described below.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-30 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (207SGSa001). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (207SGSa002). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If no backup data is stored (207SGSa003;N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003;Y, 207SGSa004;Y), the process further judges whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005;Y), the process judges whether or not a setting value changing flag indicating that a setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power outage (the power outage occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed) is set (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006;Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If the setting value changing flag is not set, the process clears the RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later was executed if the flag is set (207SGSa007), and the process judges whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with the clear switch operated (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010); if the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa010.

In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it further determines whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). If the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), it determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), a setting value change process (207SGSa013b) is executed to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d. If the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) is executed to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011;N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, i.e., whether or not to clear the RAM 102 (perform the RAM clear process (207SGSa009)) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up (207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed before proceeding to 207SGSa014, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022. If the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the process performs recovery processing to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped (power failure) (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets up a working area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to that at the time of the power outage, and if the special symbols were fluctuating, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed, causing the special symbols to resume fluctuating from the state before the recovery. The CPU 103 then assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power outage (started with a hot start), sends a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028 (207SGSa016).

In addition, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON or not, that is, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with the clear switch operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it further determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON or not (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON or not (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal settings are not set, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up through the proper procedure by an employee of the gaming parlor or the like (when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned ON, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up while operating the clear switch), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), or if the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), proceed to 207SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start and sends a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the performance control board 12 (207SGSa022). Then, it sets a cold start notification timer according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGSa023), and starts notifying the cold start by starting the blinking of all segments that make up the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-36(A) (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025) and determines whether the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026. If the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), the CPU 103 stops blinking all segments on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are flashed for the period of the cold start notification timer (e.g., 5 seconds) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is called and started, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is called and started, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be flashed, or at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

Then, at 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initializes the random number circuit 104, sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (207SGSa029), and permits the interrupt (207SGSa030). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt process.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality in the setting value to the performance control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (abnormal setting value error) or that power has been restored from a power outage during a setting change, which will be described later, etc. (207SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). The CPU 103 then decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033) and determines whether the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are executed repeatedly, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B), "E." is displayed on each of the first display unit 207SG029A, second display unit 207SG029B, third display unit 207SG029C, and fourth display unit 207SG029D constituting the display monitor 207SG029 as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power outage during a setting change (207SGSa035).

As shown in FIG. 8-37(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and outputs a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the gaming center via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation by a store clerk at the gaming center), thereby executing an error occurrence notification by the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment executes an error occurrence notification by the display monitor 207SG029, the first special pattern display device 207SG004A, and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B when an abnormal setting value is set or when power is restored after a power outage while the setting value is being changed, so that the staff of the gaming parlor can recognize the occurrence of an error or the restoration of power from a power outage while the setting value is being changed from both the front and back sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the restoration of power from a power outage while the setting value is being changed can also be recognized by the gaming parlor's management device, so the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

In the game control main process of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021, the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y), rather than when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021.

Figure 8-31 (A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, it sets (stores) "00H" in the specified address (207SGSa042). It then determines whether the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX, described below) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), it specifies the next address in the RAM 102 (207SGSa044) and determines whether the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not an address that stores a RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042. If the specified address is an address that stores a RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042 by specifying the next address (207SGSa046). Note that if the specified address is the last address of RAM 102 (207SGSa043;Y), the RAM clear process ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is assigned an address (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the second address from the top of the RAM 102 (F001) stores the provisional setting value described later. Furthermore, the third address (F002) stores a RAM clear flag. In other addresses (F003 and onwards), special and regular reserved memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information that occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and setting values (used judgment setting values) read out to set the display result judgment table when judging the variable display result in the previous special pattern normal processing are stored. In addition, the backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value indicating the factory shipping state (for example, a set value of "0") is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 is set to a value indicating the factory shipping state, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or a prompt to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute the setting change process may be displayed on the image display device 5, etc.

In other words, the RAM clear process in feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process that clears data other than the setting value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the setting value.

Note that, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is given in which data other than the set values is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, only the game information stored at a specific address in the RAM 102 (address F003 and onward in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which a RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear flag may be stored in a register of the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of the calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), thereby omitting the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 and reducing the processing load of the CPU 103. In addition, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the flexibility of the register can be improved compared to when the RAM clear flag is stored in a register of the game control microcomputer 100, so that the RAM clear flag can be prevented from being overwritten with other information (data) by the processing of the CPU 103.

Figure 8-32 is a flow chart showing the setting value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and starts blinking the right hit lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa052, see Figure 8-37 (A)). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment out of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa052a) as a mode corresponding to the setting value change process (a mode that is not a jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in Figure 8-6).

The CPU 103 also sends a setting value change start notification command to the performance control board 12 (207SGSa053) and determines whether any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in address F000 of RAM 102 (207SGSa053a). If a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (if the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), it sets the setting value to "1" in address F000 in RAM 102 (resets the setting value to "1") and proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). Note that if any of the values 1^& is stored as a setting value in RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), it proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power interruption detection process execution start waiting timer to wait until the power interruption detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power interruption detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power interruption detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). If the power interruption detection process execution start waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are executed repeatedly, and if the power interruption detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y), the power interruption detection process is executed (207SGSa057).

After executing the power interruption detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and outputs a security signal to a management device such as the gaming center's management computer via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value change in progress flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether the setting change switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting change switch 207SG052 has not been operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. If the setting change switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062; Y), the process updates the contents of address F001 in the RAM 102 based on the operation of the setting change switch 207SG052 (207SGSa063).

Specifically, if the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", then "2", which is one level more advantageous to the player than "1", is stored as a provisional setting value in address F001 of the RAM 102, and if the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", then "3", which is one level more advantageous to the player than "2", is stored as a provisional setting value in address F001 of the RAM 102. In this way, a value one greater than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored as a borrowed setting in address F001 of the RAM 102. Note that if the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", then "1" can be stored as a provisional setting value in address F001 of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (provisional setting value) stored at address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional setting value in address F001 of the RAM 102, and to display the setting value stored in address F001 on the display monitor 207SG029.

Also, if the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value change flag (207SGSa066), terminates the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa067), and turns off all segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the flashing of the right hit lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments that make up the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether or not a temporary setting value is stored in address F001 in RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If a temporary setting value is not stored in address F001 in RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. If a temporary setting value is stored in address F001 in RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), the process further judges whether or not the setting value stored in address F000 in RAM 102 differs from the temporary setting value stored in address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored in address F000 in RAM 102 is the same as the temporary setting value stored in address F001 (207SGSa070;N), proceed to 207SGSa072. If the setting value stored in address F000 in RAM 102 is different from the temporary setting value stored in address F001 (207SGSa070;Y), the temporary setting value stored in address F001 in RAM 102 is stored in address F000 (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

The CPU 103 also sends a setting value change completion notification command to the performance control board 12 (207SGSa073) and ends the setting value change process.

Figure 8-33 is a flow chart showing the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and starts blinking the right hit lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa102, see Figure 8-37 (A)). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment out of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the setting value confirmation process (a mode that is not a jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in Figure 8-6) (207SGSa103).

The CPU 103 also sends a setting value confirmation start notification command to the performance control board 12 (207SGSa104) and sets a power failure detection process execution start waiting timer to wait until the power failure detection process is executed (207SGSa105). The CPU 103 then decrements the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa106) and determines whether the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107, and if the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). Note that this power interruption detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power interruption detection process (207SGSa057) in the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power interruption detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored at address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and outputs a security signal to a management device such as the gaming center's management computer via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. Also, if the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112) and all segments constituting the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 stops flashing the right hit lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and stops lighting the segments that make up the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 sends a setting value confirmation completion notification command to the performance control board 12 (207SGSa115) and ends the setting value confirmation process.

In this way, by starting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B, and the round indicator 207SG131 to light up, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207Sg025B, and the right hit lamp 207SG232 to flash at the start of the setting value change process or setting value confirmation process, players and game parlor staff can recognize from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or confirming a setting value.

In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the setting value change process or setting value confirmation process starts, only one LED of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit as a mode corresponding to the setting value change process or setting value confirmation process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is not particularly important as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in Figure 8-6.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), an example is shown in which the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 light up in the same manner as a manner corresponding to the setting value change process or setting value confirmation process at the start of the setting value change process or setting value confirmation process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 may light up in different manners at the start of the setting value change process and the start of the setting value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned OFF (power cut) and then restarted, the setting value change process is executed by turning ON the lock switch 207SG051 and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open.

At this time, as shown in Figures 8-35(A) to 8-35(E), the display monitor 207SG029 ends the display using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in Figure 8-27) by turning off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses different numbers of display units when performing the setting value change process at startup and when displaying the base value after startup has ended.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts to be displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting change switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D in this way, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. If the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as the new setting value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned OFF (power is cut off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned ON (the clear switch is OFF) while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, thereby executing the setting value confirmation process.

At this time, as shown in Figures 8-35(A), 8-35(B) and 8-35(E), the display monitor 207SG029 ends the display using the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in Figure 8-27) by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units when performing the setting value confirmation process at start-up and when displaying the base value after start-up has finished.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fourth display unit 207SG029D starts displaying the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display of the setting values in the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes playable.

Figure 8-34 is a flowchart showing the power interruption detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a power interruption signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value has been input (207SGS081). If there is no power interruption signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends. If there is a power interruption signal input (207SGS081; Y), the process identifies backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 (207SGS082) and stores the identified backup data in a backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, check data used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), and the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the CPU 103 executes S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) after executing the same power interruption detection processing (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature unit 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 8-39. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (207SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in 207SGS502 (207SGS502; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (207SGS505). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 207SGS505 (207SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506).

After executing either of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (207SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 extracts and identifies the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 (207SGS509). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol, and specifies the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) described later.

Following the processing of 207SGS510, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

Following the processing of 207SGS511, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (207SGS512). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (207SGS513). The pending memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the process of 207SGS504 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS516), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball.

Figure 8-40 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by 207SGS512 in Figure 8-39 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 207SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 5, Figure 8-41) described later determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a "big win" and a big win game state, and whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a "small win" and a small win game state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of 207SGS512 to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to stop display the big win symbol or the small win symbol as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not there will be a big win or a small win at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "big win" or a "small win" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbols will be, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a pre-reading preview performance such as a pending display preview performance, as described below.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 8-40(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31 (B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special chart display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start port buffer value, and the setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result judgment module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-42, a process is performed to judge whether the special chart display result will be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss".

As shown in FIG. 8-42, in the variable display result judgment module, the CPU 103 compares the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the set special chart display result judgment table with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result (207SGS571), and judges whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (207SGS572). At this time, by judging that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be judged that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If 207SGS572 determines that the value is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it determines that the variable display will result in a jackpot (207SGS576). On the other hand, if 207SGS572 determines that the value is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it determines that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (207SGS572; N), the numerical range of the small win determination value in the set special chart display result determination table is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for special chart display result determination (207SGS573), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special chart display result determination extracted in 207SGS509 of FIG. 8-39 is within a predetermined small win determination range (207SGS574).

If it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined in 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, in other words, if it is determined that there will not be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that there will be a miss in the variable display (207SGS575).

Returning to FIG. 8-40(A), 207SGS575 checks whether it has determined that the variable display will result in a big win (207SGS526), and if it has determined that it will not result in a big win (207SGS526; N), it checks whether it has determined that the variable display will result in a small win (207SGS527), and if it has determined that it will not result in a small win, in other words, if it has determined that the variable display will result in a miss (207SGS526; N), it executes the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" (207SGS527a), and determines whether the time-saving flag is set, in other words, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (207SGS528).

When 207SGS526 determines that a jackpot will occur in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the type of jackpot is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot and the jackpot type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the type of jackpot from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (either the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the type of jackpot, it determines which of the multiple types of jackpots the jackpot type is determined to be.

Then, the sending setting of the symbol designation command according to the determined type of jackpot is executed (207SGS534), that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a jackpot B, and the fourth symbol designation command if it is a jackpot C. Then, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table according to the type of jackpot is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (207SGS535), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

In addition, if 207SGS527 determines that the variable display will result in a small win (207SGS527; Y), it executes the sending setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win" (207SGS531), selects and sets the variable pattern determination table for small wins (207SGS532), and proceeds to 207SGS536.

In addition, if the time-saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time-saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y), loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). Note that loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. In addition, loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature section 207SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the combined number of reserved memories is 2 to 4, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the combined number of reserved memories is 5 or more, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 8-24, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned as follows: 1 to 450 when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, 1 to 410 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 390 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 370 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the setting value is 6.

In addition, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, the possible ranges of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned as follows: 1 - 500 when the setting value is 1, 1 - 480 when the setting value is 2, 1 - 460 when the setting value is 3, 1 - 440 when the setting value is 4, 1 - 420 when the setting value is 5, and 1 - 400 when the setting value is 6.

In addition, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C and miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned as follows: when the set value is 1, 1 to 550; when the set value is 2, 1 to 530; when the set value is 3, 1 to 510; when the set value is 4, 1 to 490; when the set value is 5, 1 to 470; and when the set value is 6, 1 to 450.

On the other hand, in all of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables, the range of possible values for the random number value MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the Super Reach fluctuation pattern is assigned from 701 to 997, regardless of the setting value.

For this reason, in the 207SGS529, by determining the fluctuation pattern using miss fluctuation pattern determination table A or miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determination will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so when determining the initial winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using miss fluctuation pattern determination table A or miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (207SGS536). In this characteristic part 207SG, as shown in FIG. 8-40(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach or small hit), are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing of 207SGS536 is set to be sent to the performance control board 12 (207SGS537), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

The pattern designation command and variable category designation command are sent by the CPU 103 executing the command control process.

Figure 8-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 5 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 8-41, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (207SGS541). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of 207SGS541, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the number of reserved second special charts in 207SGS541 is other than "0" (207SGS541;N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151B corresponding to reserved number "1" is read and identified as the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151B (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (207SGS544), and then the process moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in 207SGS541, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started to be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts in 207SGS545 is other than "0" (207SGS545; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out and identified as the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (207SGS546). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit 207SG151A (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (207SGS548), and then the process proceeds to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is determined by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 determines that the game is in the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, determines that the game is in the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and determines that the game is in the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31 (B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-31(B)) and determines whether or not a determined used setting value is stored (207SGS551). If it determines that a determined used setting value is stored (207SGS551: Y), it compares the setting value identified in 207SGS550 with the stored determined used setting value (207SGS552) and determines whether or not the identified setting value is the same as the stored determined used setting value (207SGS553).

If 207SGS553 determines that the identified setting value is not the same as the stored used setting value (207SGS553: N), the effect control board 12 is set to send an error command corresponding to the abnormality in the setting value (207SGS554), and a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the gaming center via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop process is started. After this, the CPU 103 will not execute any other processes, and the pachinko gaming machine will be placed in an unplayable state (unplayable state) by the loop process. The error command is sent by the CPU 103 executing the command control process.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the setting value referenced when the previous variable display was executed (determined used setting value) differs from the setting value currently stored in the first address of the RAM 102, the gaming center management device can recognize that the determined used setting value differs from the setting value currently stored in the first address of the RAM 102, thereby improving the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, the CPU 103 executes a loop process and does not execute other processes to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an unplayable state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an unplayable state by executing processes such as restricting the release of gaming balls and not paying out prize balls or displaying variable special patterns even if a gaming ball enters each winning slot.

In addition, in the normal processing of special symbols in this feature section 207SG, the difference between the used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the top address of RAM 102 is regarded as an abnormality, and an example is given of a form in which the abnormality can be recognized by the management device of the amusement facility, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be set to a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in Figure 8-36 (B) and Figure 8-37 (B), thereby notifying the player, amusement facility staff, etc. of the abnormality.

In addition, in the normal processing of the special symbol in this feature section 207SG, if the determination used setting value differs from the setting value currently stored in the top address of RAM 102, an error designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 and a security signal is output to the gaming center management device only once each, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sending of the error designation command and the output of the security signal may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the aforementioned non-playable state.

In addition, in the normal processing of the special symbol in this feature section 207SG, an example has been given in which the CPU 103 controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an unplayable state when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102 are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 does not have to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an unplayable state when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102 are different.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an unplayable state when the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102 are different, then, for example, a security signal may be output only to the gaming facility's management device, or the setting value stored in the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset. Note that, when resetting the setting value stored in the top address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used setting value may be stored in the top address of the RAM 102, or a value most disadvantageous to the player (1 in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment) may be set to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the gaming facility.

If 207SGS551 determines that there is no memory of the used-for-determination setting value, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N), or if it determines that the setting value specified in 207SGS553 is the same as the stored used-for-determination setting value (207SGS553: Y), a special chart display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start port buffer value, and setting value is selected and set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-40(A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 8-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Next, it is checked whether 207SGS557 has determined that the variable display will result in a big win (207SGS558), and if it has determined that the big win will not occur (207SGS558; N), it is checked whether 207SGS557 has determined that the variable display will result in a small win (207SGS559).

When 207SGS558 determines that the variable display indicates a jackpot (207SGS558; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to ON (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) (B) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type will be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of 207SGS563, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special symbol as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a guaranteed variable state which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564). As an example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", it can be set to "1", if it is "jackpot B", it can be set to "2", and if it is "jackpot C", it can be set to "3".

On the other hand, if 207SGS559 determines that a small win will occur in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560, where the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to ON (207SGS560).

On the other hand, if 207SGS559 does not determine that the variable display will result in a small win, in other words, if the variable display will result in a miss (207SGS559; N), proceed to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, the fixed special symbol is set according to the result of the pre-determination of whether to control to a jackpot game state (whether the jackpot flag is set), whether to control to a small jackpot game state (whether the jackpot flag is set), and the result of the determination of the jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determination of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, when 207SGS558 determines that the special symbol display result is "jackpot", if the jackpot type in 207SGS563 is "jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the special chart display result is determined to be a "small win" in 207SGS559 (when the small win flag is set in 207SGS560), the special chart showing the symbol "2", which is a small win pattern, is set as the determined special chart in response to the pre-determined result that the special chart display result is a "small win". Note that these determined special charts are only examples, and other determined special charts may be set, or multiple types of charts may be set as determined special charts.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in 207SGS565, the setting value identified in 207SGS553 is updated and stored in RAM 102 as the determined used setting value (207SGS566), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (207SGS567), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the reserved memory number for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (207SGS568), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the judged used setting value is stored in the RAM 102 as one piece of game information (see FIG. 8-31 (B)), so when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the judged used setting value is not present when the first variable display is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by storing the judged used setting value in an area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clear process, it is possible to compare the judged used setting value with the setting value stored in the first address of the RAM 102 (the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) when the first variable display is executed even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-40 and 8-41, an example is given of a form in which the variable display result is determined using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module may include a process (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in Figure 8-41) for comparing a setting value identified by the CPU 103 (a setting value stored in the first address of RAM 102) with a determined used setting value, and a process (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game stop state if the setting value identified by the CPU 103 does not match the determined used setting value as a result of the processing. In this way, even when the winning random number value determination process is executed, the process of comparing the set value identified by the CPU 103 with the used set value for determination and the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game stop state if the set value identified by the CPU 103 does not match the used set value for determination as a result of the process can be executed, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the performance control CPU 120.

Figure 8-43 is a flowchart showing the main performance control process executed by the performance control CPU 120. In the main performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

The performance control CPU 120 also sets a command reception waiting timer according to the waiting period for receiving a command sent from the main board 11 (207SGS403). It then decrements the value of the command reception waiting timer by 1 (207SGS404) and determines whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). If the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), it repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 and waits until the command reception waiting timer has timed out.

If the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). If a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored from a power outage, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc., stored in the RAM 122 after the input of the player information is accepted in the player information input process described below) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If a hot start notification command has not been received (207SGS406; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a cold notification command has been received (207SGS408). If a cold notification command has been received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 (including information on the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc. stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko game machine 1 was started) are cleared (207SGS409), and a RAM clear notification process is executed to notify (execute a RAM clear notification) that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared (207SGS410). In addition, the RAM clear notification process only requires that an image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(A), notification image 207SG005M1 on image display device 5 notifying that the player information and presentation information stored in RAM 122 have been cleared) be displayed on image display device 5, game effect lamp 9 be illuminated, and sound be output from speakers 8L, 8R for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) to notify the arcade staff member who started up pachinko gaming machine 1 that the player information and presentation information stored in RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

If no cold start notification command has been received (207SGS408;N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command or a setting value check start notification command has been received (207SGS411). If a setting value change start notification command or a setting value check start notification command has been received (207SGS411;Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up in a setting value change state or a setting value check state, a setting value related notification process is executed to notify that a setting value is being changed (setting value change notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value check notification) (207SGS412).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as a notification that a setting value is being changed or a setting value is being confirmed, as shown in Figures 8-50 (B) and 8-50 (C), a notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that a setting value is being changed or a notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that a setting value is being confirmed is displayed on the image display device 5. However, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state is generally a state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a store clerk or the like at the gaming parlor who changes or confirms the setting value is visually viewing the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. In other words, the setting value change state and setting value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be seen by the arcade staff who change or confirm the setting values, and therefore it is considered that the arcade staff cannot determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state from the display on the image display device 5. Therefore, as a notification that a setting value is being changed or a setting value is being confirmed, a sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R or the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 may be used to notify the arcade staff who change or confirm the setting values that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is running in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

The performance control CPU 120 also executes a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body initialization process (207SGS414) for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. Note that in the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (see FIG. 8-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be explained using Fig. 8-47 and Fig. 8-48. Fig. 8-47 is a schematic diagram showing the operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the performance control CPU 120. Fig. 8-48 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in actual operation confirmation operation control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in non-detection operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are arranged so that they can move back and forth between their respective origin positions (first position) and performance positions (second position), and the forward movement from the origin position to the performance position (second position) and the return movement from the performance position to the origin position are the actual operating modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display, etc.

When the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is executed, if the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332, that is, if the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 have moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, when they have been transported or installed on the play island, or when they were unable to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when the motor is When the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are in a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the combined position, such as the position shown by the black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 8-32) due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 being unable to confirm the origin return or unable to operate due to loss of synchronism, failure, or getting stuck, or the movable bodies have moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine, non-detection operation control is executed to return them to the origin. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are in a position away from the origin position, so the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 toward the origin position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes actual operation confirmation operation control when non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332. The actual operation confirmation operation control is the same as the actual operation actually performed in a performance using the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 (for example, a movable body performance executed during variable display, etc.).

Next, the control speeds set by the performance control CPU 120 when executing non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. The speeds shown in Figures 8-48 (A) and 8-48 (B) are control speeds set by the performance control CPU 120 to operate each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, and are different from the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322. In other words, for example, when operating a specific movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the performance position, if the one movement section and the other movement section have different characteristics (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or if the same movement section is ascending and descending, the operation speed when the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is actually operated may differ from the control speed. In addition, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 will not necessarily be the same. When multiple movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors with the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 will not necessarily be the same.

As shown in FIG. 8-48(A), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, it operates the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 based on the control speed set in the set actual operation check process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. Specifically, it controls the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 to accelerate from the origin position, then decelerate and stop at the performance position, and accelerate from the performance position, then decelerate and stop at the origin position. In other words, in the actual operation check operation control to confirm that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is changed in the order of slow → fast → slow between the origin position and the performance position. In other words, when performing a performance using each of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, the performance control CPU 120 controls each of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 to operate at a speed within the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) which is the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed, and therefore, even when performing operation control for confirming actual operation, the performance control CPU 120 controls each of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 to operate at a speed within the range between the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) which is the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed.

In other words, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, and the control speeds are set so as to be the minimum and maximum operating speeds. In the following, it will be explained that when the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they operate at the maximum speed.

The control speed is set so that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the performance position, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are controlled to have the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for a longer period of time than when stopped at the performance position, so that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are reliably decelerated before the detection target is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-48(B), when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection motion control, it controls the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 to always move at the minimum speed (first speed) in the motion control for actual motion check during the period in which they are moved from any position between the origin position and the performance position to the origin position. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 to always move based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the motion control for actual motion check so that the maximum speed (maximum motion speed) in the non-detection motion control as the first motion control is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the motion control for actual motion check as the second motion control (in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the motion control for actual motion check).

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are from the origin position, if the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are located near the origin position, if they are operated at the control speed when accelerated in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, that is, at high speed, there is a risk that the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332 will not be able to reliably detect the detection target when the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position, or that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. will be damaged due to the impact when the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position from a close distance and their movement is restricted. Therefore, they are controlled to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value early change end flag, indicating that the setting value change or setting value confirmation has ended during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321, has been set (207SGS415). If the setting value early change end flag has not been set (207SGS415; N), it further determines whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; N), it proceeds to 207SGS412, and if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command has not been received (207SGS416; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS417. If the early setting value change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing 207SGS416.

In 207SGS417, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has not been completed (207SGS417; N), the CPU 120 sets the early setting value change completion flag and proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed (207SGS417; Y), the CPU 120 determines whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), proceed to 207SGS412. If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), determine whether the early setting value change completion flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, if the early setting value change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the early setting value change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), a first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), which is the same process as 207SGS413, and a second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as 207SGS414, are executed, and it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed in the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) (207SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), proceed to 207SGS422. If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS424; Y), proceed to 207SGS427.

As described above, with regard to the processing of 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 8-49(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the setting value change notification or setting value confirmation notification from the time when it receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command (the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state), and executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process. As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (A), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command during the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, that is, if the setting value change or confirmation is completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (B), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing when only the first movable body initialization process has ended among the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, that is, if the setting value change or setting value confirmation ends when the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has ended but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has not yet ended, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process ends.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization process has not yet ended, in other words, if the setting value change or setting value confirmation ends before the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has ended, only the first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process that are being executed are executed, and the first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If 207SGS411 does not receive the setting value change start notification command or the setting value check start notification command (207SGS411; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received (207SGS425). If an error designation command has been received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify the error indicated by the error designation command, and if an error designation command has not been received (207SGS425; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS403.

In addition, as an error notification in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 8-50 (D), a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to an error specified from the error specification command may be displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to an error specified from the error specification command on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can recognize from the notification image 207SG005M4 that an invalid value has been set as the setting value, that the power has been turned back on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after a power interruption occurred while changing the setting value, and that the setting value referenced in the previous variable display (determined used setting value) is different from the setting value stored in the top address of the RAM 102. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, there are two error notification processes: an error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and an error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed.

Of these, for the error notification process (207SGS426) which can be executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on an error that occurs when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (reception of an error designation command sent by the CPU 103 in processing 207SGSa031 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. 8-30), and for the error notification process (207SGS439) which can be executed after the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on an error that occurs after the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed (reception of an error designation command sent by the CPU 103 in processing 207SGS554 of the special pattern normal processing shown in FIG. 8-41).

In this way, in the main performance control process in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-44, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the player information (the number of changes since the input of the player information was accepted, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc.) is cleared from the RAM 122, while the performance information (the number of changes since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was last started, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc.) and the setting value information (a number between "1" and "6" corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting value change state or a setting confirmation state, the player information and performance information are not cleared from the RAM 122, but the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122 is overwritten (updated and stored).

In other words, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, cold start, setting value confirmation state, or setting value change state.

Then, in 207SGS427, the performance control CPU 120 identifies whether it has received a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value check end notification command, and starts displaying the initial pattern corresponding to the received command on the image display device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-45, if the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value check end notification command, or a cold start notification command, in other words, if no new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 starts displaying a combination of decorative patterns of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial pattern. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, in other words, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 starts displaying a combination of decorative patterns of "4", "5", and "6" from the left as the initial pattern.

In the feature section 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 starts displaying decorative patterns in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" from the left as the initial patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set, the decorative patterns may be displayed in a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial patterns at a higher rate than when a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. In this way, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and interest in the game can be increased.

In the feature section 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 starts displaying a combination of decorative patterns of "4", "5", and "6" from the left as the initial patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial patterns displayed on the image display device 5 may be different when a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. In addition, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9 may be different when a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, the performance control CPU 120 sets the look-ahead regulation counter to "4" in order to regulate the execution of the look-ahead preview performance in the first four variations (207SGS428). The performance control CPU 120 then moves to a loop process in which it monitors the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the performance control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following process.

The performance control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process to notify the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS431). In the startup notification process, for example, it is determined whether the interrupt is the first interrupt since the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt since the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it identifies whether a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, selects a startup notification process table corresponding to the received command, and starts a startup notification process timer corresponding to the received command. Then, after starting the startup notification process timer, the startup notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed based on the value of the startup notification process timer and the startup notification process table by executing the startup notification process in the next or subsequent interrupt.

In the characteristic section 207SG in this embodiment, the manner in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified when it is started differs depending on whether the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change completion notification command, or a setting value confirmation completion notification command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-46, if a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, if no new setting values have been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect lamp 9 will emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R will output sound A for 30 seconds. Note that the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting sound A for 30 seconds are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting sound A for 30 seconds may be different.

In addition, if a cold start notification command is received when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, if no new setting values have been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 has been cleared, the game effect lamp 9 will emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R will output sound B for 30 seconds. Note that the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting sound B for 30 seconds are the same, but the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the speakers 8L, 8R start outputting sound B for 30 seconds may be different.

In other words, the specific control in this invention includes both the execution of the performance control CPU 120 lighting the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound A from the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, and the execution of the performance control CPU 120 lighting the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B from the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start.

In addition, if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game effect lamp 9 will light up for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R will output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 will display a message image (e.g., a message image indicating that the setting value change has ended) for 40 seconds. Note that the start timing of the game effect lamp 9's 40-second light emission, the start timing of the sound C output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the start timing of the message image display on the image display device 5 are the same, but the start timing of the game effect lamp 9's 40-second light emission, the start timing of the sound C output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the start timing of the message image display on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when a setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, unlike when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a message image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it easier to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

In the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, the start-up notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is exemplified by using the game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, and image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming center management computer or a machine counter, and a signal capable of identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as the start-up notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the device that executes the startup notification is partially common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (in either case, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated and sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, a message image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device).

The notification mode of each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started in a hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, all of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be illuminated, whereas when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L, 8R (if the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with three or more speakers, sound is output from only some of the speakers), and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, the game machine frame 207SG003 is often closed, so sound may be output from all of the speakers 8L, 8R. Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a message image such as "setting change in progress" indicating that the setting is being changed may be displayed on the image display device 5, while when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, a message image such as "RAM has been cleared" indicating that the RAM 102 and RAM 122 have been cleared may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with multiple external output terminals as described above, the terminal that outputs a signal to the management device may be different depending on the notification. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change as a setting value change notification for the period until the setting value change is completed (the period until the setting value change completion notification command or setting value designation command is received), and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. Note that if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, it is sufficient to only output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different for each notification.

As described above, the startup notification process shows an example in which the startup notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the startup notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Also, the startup notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown to be executed regardless of whether a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value check completion notification command, or a setting value change completion notification command is received, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be provided a command among the hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value check completion notification command, and setting value change completion notification command that does not execute the startup notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if it is received.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, examples are given of a startup notification of a different type being executed depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a decorative pattern of a different combination being displayed on the image display device 5 depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the startup notification type and the decorative pattern combination as these initialization effects may all be different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only some of them may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a startup notification is executed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, when it is started with a cold start, when it is started with a setting change state, or when it is started with a setting confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started with a setting confirmation state, these startup notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power failure detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-51, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a power failure signal has been input, indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (207SGS441). If there is no power failure signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated, and if there is a power failure signal input (207SGS441; Y), backup data including setting value information and player information stored in RAM 122 is identified (207SGS442), and the identified backup data is stored in a backup data memory area provided in RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, check data to be used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), after which the system transitions to a loop process in which no processing is performed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 8-43, next, the performance control CPU 120 analyzes the received performance control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (command analysis processing: 207SGS433). In this command analysis processing, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command sent from the main board 11 that is stored in the received command buffer. Note that the performance control command sent from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the performance control INT signal and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 8-8) the performance control command stored in the buffer area is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs performance control process processing (207SGS434). In the performance control process processing, from among the processes according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (performance control process flag) is selected, and display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Then, a random number update process for effects (207SGS435) is executed to update the count value of a counter for generating random numbers for effects such as random numbers for determining a jackpot pattern, a player information input process (207SGS436) to accept input of player information, a player information output process (207SGS437) to output player information, a performance information compilation process (207SGS438) to compile performance information, and an error notification process (207SGS439). Then, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the performance control CPU 120 accepts input of a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance. The player can access the server and receive the generated password by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone) by the player operating the stick controller 31A or push button 31B, and stores the player information identified from the password in RAM 122. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, number of jackpots, number of super reaches, etc., as player information stored each time a variable display, jackpot game, or super reach is executed.

In the player information output process, the performance control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in RAM 122 through the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B, and displays the two-dimensional code on the image display device 5. After the display of the two-dimensional code has finished, the player information stored in RAM 122 is cleared. The player can read the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and send the player information compiled during the current game to an external server, thereby storing the cumulative player information on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the server.

In the performance information aggregation process, the performance control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as performance information each time a variable display, jackpot game, or super reach is executed.

In the error notification process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the CPU 103. If an error designation command has been received, the CPU 120 executes an error notification according to the received error designation command.

Next, the performance control process in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-52, in the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), and then executes the hold display update process (207SGS454) in which the hold memory display number and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed in the first hold memory display area 207SG005D and the second hold memory display area 207SG005U are updated according to the hold memory display number and the hold display flag value stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 207SG194A, and executes one of the processes from S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the performance control process flag.

If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451;N), it is further determined whether the value of the performance control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). If the value of the performance control process flag is any one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452;N), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed and one of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the performance control process flag. If the value of the performance control process flag is "1" (207SGS452;Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed, and one of the processes S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the performance control process flag. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, immediately after startup, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is designed to restrict the execution of pre-reading preview effects until the variable display is executed four times.

In the feature section 207SG in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control main processing and the performance control process processing based on the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby restricting the execution of the pre-reading preview performance over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may not execute the start winning determination processing (see FIG. 5) based on the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby restricting the execution of the pre-reading preview performance over four variable displays.

As described above, the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment shows an example of restricting the execution of the pre-reading preview performance over four variable displays when play is enabled on the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. When play is enabled, the settings related to game progress, such as the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, and the settings of the performance according to the RTC, may be reset to the factory settings.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a hold display preview effect can be executed as a look-ahead preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and examples of look-ahead preview effects include an effect in which a specific background image is displayed on the image display device 5, the movement of a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each setting value is set as a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values. In other words, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Therefore, when determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state, it is sufficient to determine whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each setting value, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

In particular, in the feature portion 207SG of this embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one value within the range of 0 to 65535 with 1020 as the base value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are set, there is no need to execute multiple determinations of whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether to control to a jackpot gaming state), and therefore the processing load on the CPU 103 to determine whether to control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the gaming state is normal, time-saving, or special-variable state, the aforementioned hit determination value of 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Therefore, when determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to the normal state or time-saving state, and whether or not it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to the special-variable state, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 when determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special chart is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special chart is 655, which is approximately twice as many), while the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32,767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).
Therefore, when determining whether or not to control to a small hit game state, it is sufficient to determine whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variable special chart, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 when determining whether or not to control to a small hit game state.

As shown in Figs. 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the large hit determination value when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when determining whether or not to control to the large hit game state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each setting value, and when determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value corresponding to the variable special chart. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to the large hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state can be reduced.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment is capable of storing the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8-41, the CPU 103 in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102 each time a variable display is started (each time a variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), sets the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value corresponding to the read setting value (sets a display result determination table according to the setting value), and determines whether or not to control to a jackpot game state. In other words, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value from the RAM 102 each time a variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting value, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result determination from being made due to an inappropriate setting value being read out.

In the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, a setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time a variable display is executed, and a display result judgment table is set according to the read setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the CPU 103 may read a setting value from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set a display result judgment table according to the read setting value. In this way, when a display result judgment table according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is set when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, all variable display results can be judged using the set display result judgment table during the period until a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the RAM 102 each time a variable display is started (each time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and compares the read setting value with the setting value read from the RAM 102 to determine the previous variable display result (the used setting value for determination). If the comparison result shows that the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the used setting value for determination, an error notification is executed by an image displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-50), so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading an inappropriate setting value. Furthermore, not only can it be more accurately identified that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but it can also be made known to those around the gaming machine that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal, so that the staff of the gaming arcade can quickly deal with the abnormal setting value.

In the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which the setting value stored in RAM 102 is compared with the used setting value for determination each time the variable display is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value stored in RAM 102 and the used setting value for determination may be compared based on a predetermined number of executions of the variable display or the passage of a predetermined time.

The CPU 103 also compares the setting value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used setting value, and if the comparison result indicates that the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the previously used setting value for judgment, it sends an error designation command to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on receiving the error designation command from the CPU 103, so that an appropriate setting value is read out, thereby more reliably preventing an inappropriate variable display result from being judged.

In addition, as shown in Figures 8-40 to 8-42, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result using a common variable display result determination module when executing the random number value determination at the time of winning and when executing the normal special pattern processing, so that part of the processing can be shared between executing the random number value determination at the time of winning and when executing the normal special pattern processing, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, if the variable special chart is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. However, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 (sets the display result determination table according to the setting value read from the RAM 102), so the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether to control to a small hit game state can be reduced. Furthermore, as in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the numerical range of the large hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 are set, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 can be shared, so the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, when the setting value of 1 (the setting value with the lowest probability of a jackpot) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Therefore, when the setting value of 1 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control the machine to a jackpot gaming state using only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 in determining whether or not to control the machine to a jackpot gaming state.

In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, an example is shown in which the jackpot reference value is set to the minimum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values. In other words, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, an example is shown in which the small hit reference value is set to the minimum value of the common numerical range of small hit determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of small hit determination values.

This embodiment also includes the invention 207SG described below. That is, in the past, a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value change function is described in, for example, JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the setting state is only notified on the LCD screen, so there is a problem that the setting state cannot be notified appropriately. Therefore, when focusing on this problem, the gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG that solves this problem is as follows:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The information display unit (e.g., the game information display unit 207SG200) includes a variable display unit (e.g., a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and is capable of performing at least variable display,
When a specific condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are all ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the state transitions to a setting state in which the setting means can set a setting value (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32),
When the setting state is reached, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), when the CPU 103 is executing a setting value change process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit up).
According to this feature, a setting state is notified in an information display section in which variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, thereby enabling appropriate notification.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The information display unit (e.g., the game information display unit 207SG200) includes a variable display unit (e.g., a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and is capable of performing at least variable display,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the state transitions to a confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 8-33).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize that the confirmation state is reached (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit up).
According to this feature, a confirmation state is notified in an information display section in which variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, thereby enabling appropriate notification.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 207SG,
The display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is a display that is different from the display displayed on the information display unit during play (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-4 and 8-37, the display mode when the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result is different from the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is in effect).
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize whether the game machine is in a setting state or a confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 207SG,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that allows the user to recognize that the device is in the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the variable display unit (for example, a portion that lights up all the segments that make up the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B).
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be given in the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments),
As a display that allows the setting state or the confirmation state to be recognized, all of the small display units are displayed in a lit state (for example, a portion that lights up all segments constituting the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B).
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state is being set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (e.g., a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game,
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (e.g., a right hit lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, the firing direction notification unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize that the state is in the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), a portion that causes the right hit lamp 207SG132 to flash in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state).
According to this feature, the launch direction notification section can provide an appropriate notification.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 207SG,
A reserve storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) is provided for storing information related to the variable display as reserve information;
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (e.g., a first hold display unit 207SG025A and a second hold display unit 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold memory stored in the hold memory means,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, the hold display section displays a display that allows the user to recognize that the state is in the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), a section that causes all segments constituting the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B to flash in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state).
According to this feature, an appropriate notification can be given in the pending display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 207SG,
A special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) is provided that can change, in the advantageous state, between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is more difficult to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number of times notifying unit (e.g., a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times that the special variable device becomes the first state in the advantageous state,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, the count notifying unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize that the state is in the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), only one segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state).
According to this feature, the number of times notifying section can perform an appropriate notification.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 207SG,
a game information storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (e.g., a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
a state information storage means (e.g., an area of address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (e.g., a RAM clear flag) capable of identifying the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
When a first condition (e.g., a state in which a clear switch is ON) is satisfied, including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (e.g., a state in which a clear switch is ON), an initialization process (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-31(A)) for initializing the gaming information storage means accompanied by erasing the gaming information can be executed;
When a second condition (e.g., the clear switch is ON and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) is satisfied, including the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means being a special state (e.g., a state in which the clear switch is ON) a setting change process for changing the setting value can be executed, and an initialization process common to the initialization process executed when the first condition is satisfied can be executed based on the status information stored in the status information storage means (e.g., a portion capable of executing a RAM clear process and a setting value change process);
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31(A), the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the RAM clear process).
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when a first condition is met and when a second condition is met, so that the initialization process based on the status information can be accurately executed while preventing an increase in the memory capacity of the processing program for the initialization process.

This embodiment also includes the invention 208SG described below. That is, in the past, a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value change function is described in, for example, JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A had a problem in that it was not possible to appropriately ignore the occurrence of a specified error in the setting state. Therefore, when focusing on this problem, the gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves this problem is as follows:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
The information display unit (e.g., the game information display unit 207SG200) includes a variable display unit (e.g., a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and is capable of performing at least variable display,
When a specific condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are all ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the state transitions to a setting state in which the setting means can set a setting value (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a specific error occurs, a display that can identify the occurrence of the specific error is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), when an error occurs that is equal to or greater than a set value, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, in a variable display area in which variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed, even if a specific condition is met, a display notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, so that it is possible to preferably notify the user that a specific condition has been met but a specific error has occurred.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A gaming machine is described in which the specified error is at least an error relating to the memory area in which the setting value is stored (e.g., an error exceeding the set value), and according to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify the user that an error has occurred relating to the memory area in which the setting value is stored and that the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 208SG,
If a power outage occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is confirmed, when the power is restored from the power outage, even if no error occurs in the memory area in which the setting value is stored, a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored from a power outage during a setting change as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), all segments constituting the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B are flashed).
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably notify the player that the setting value needs to be reset when a power outage occurs before the setting value is finalized, without introducing a new error.

This embodiment also includes the invention 209SG shown below. That is, in the past, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. Also, as a pachinko gaming machine equipped with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information related to the granted gaming value, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there was a problem that the cost of the gaming machine could not be reduced if a display unit for checking the setting value and the information display means were provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on this problem, as a gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves this problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of controlling the game to an advantageous state for a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
A game value providing means for providing a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a portion for paying out prize balls when a game ball enters a first start winning hole, a second start winning hole, a general winning hole 10, a large winning hole, etc.);
An information display means (e.g., a display monitor 207SG029) having a plurality of display units (e.g., a first display unit 207SG029A to a fourth display unit 207SG029D) and capable of displaying predetermined information (e.g., a base value shown in FIG. 8-27(C)) relating to the game value provided by the game value providing means;
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying setting value information that can identify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, when the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a portion that can display the setting value in the setting value confirmation state).
The number of display units used differs depending on whether the specified information is displayed or the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35, when a base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when a setting value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, only the fourth display unit 207SG029D is used).
According to this feature, since the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the gaming value, there is no need to separately provide a display means for displaying the setting value information, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means is capable of displaying error information capable of identifying the occurrence of an error relating to at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(B), when a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of display units used is the same when the specified information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-35(A) and FIG. 8-36(B), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used in both cases when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and when the occurrence of an abnormal error is displayed).
According to this feature, it is possible to notify an error occurring in a memory area in which a setting value is stored, and to easily recognize that the error information is different from the setting value information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each composed of eight segments),
A detection means (e.g., a clear switch) is provided for detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (e.g., the clear switch is ON), the information display means turns on all of the small display sections constituting each display section to a fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-36(A), all of the segments constituting the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D are repeatedly lit and unlit (blinked)).
The publication describes a gaming machine characterized by the above feature, which allows the user to check whether all of the small display sections are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 209SG,
A detection means (e.g., a clear switch) is provided for detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the setting value information without being in the full lighting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32, when the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
According to this feature, the setting values can be quickly confirmed.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a check operation of a movable body based on a change operation of a set value, there is, for example, one described in JP 2017-189349 A. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2017-189349 A, if a check operation of a movable body is executed while changing a set value, it is considered that the operator will miss the check operation. Therefore, it is considered to execute the check operation again after the end of the change operation of the set value, but in this case, if the change operation of the set value ends during the first check operation of the movable body, a new check operation of the movable body will start from the timing when the change operation ends, and there is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
An operably arranged movable body (e.g., a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322),
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting means transitions to a setting state in which the setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are all ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process).
The control means
A confirmation operation control (e.g., actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body can operate normally can be executed when the setting state is transitioned to and when the setting state is ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing at which the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, and a part in which the performance control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing at which the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing a confirmation operation due to confirmation operation control at the time of transition to the setting state, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check end notification command during a second movable body initialization process being executed based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check start notification command, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the setting value change end notification command or the setting value check end notification command).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
An operably arranged movable body (e.g., a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322),
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-32) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means;
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state transitions to a confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process).
The control means
A confirmation operation control (e.g., a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body can operate normally can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing at which the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, and a part in which the performance control CPU 120 sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing at which the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command).
If the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing a confirmation operation due to confirmation operation control at the time of transition to the confirmation state, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check end notification command during a second movable body initialization process being executed based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check start notification command, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the setting value change end notification command or the setting value check end notification command).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, a return operation control (e.g., non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation to position the movable body at the origin position can be executed before executing the confirmation operation control, and when the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (e.g., a part that executes actual operation confirmation operation control after ending non-detection automatic operation control in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 210SG,
The control means
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing a confirmation operation, confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed if the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command during execution of the first movable body initialization process based on receiving a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is newly executed after execution of the second movable body initialization process). A part that does not execute initialization processing), whereas if the operating status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, it executes confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(B), if the first movable body initialization processing is terminated based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, and if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, it executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in sequence after the second movable body initialization processing is terminated).
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is ended, the confirmation operation can be executed again depending on the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies are provided,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be executed sequentially for each of the movable bodies (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a first face-to-face initialization process and a second movable body initialization process in sequence),
In the case where the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation has not been completed for all of the movable bodies, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed satisfies a predetermined condition, confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(C), if the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command during execution of a first movable body initialization process based on receiving a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is newly executed after execution of the second movable body initialization process). On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49(B), if the first movable body initialization process is completed based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command, and the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value change notification command or a setting value confirmation notification command during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in sequence after the completion of the second movable body initialization process).
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is ended, the confirmation operation can be executed again depending on the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic feature 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, the game information display part 207SG200 is exemplified as being composed of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the normal symbol display device 207SG020, the normal hold indicator 207SG025C, the round indicator 207SG131, the right hit lamp 207SG132, the probability change lamp 207SG133, and the time reduction lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information display part 207SG200 may or may not include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner when the CPU 103 is executing a setting value change process (setting value change state) and when the CPU 103 is executing a setting value confirmation process (setting value confirmation state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners when the CPU 103 is executing a setting value change process and when the CPU 103 is executing a setting value confirmation process. In this way, it is possible to easily notify whether the pachinko game machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state based on the lighting or blinking state of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B are lit up, thereby making the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B different from the display mode when the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. However, in the present invention, is not limited to this, and as long as the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state or setting value confirmation state is different from the display mode when the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, some of the segments that make up the first special pattern display device 207SG004A or the second special pattern display device 207SG004B may not be lit.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit, and all segments constituting the right hit lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are flashed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, the flashing of the right hit lamp 207SG132, and the flashing of all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B may not be performed, or only some of them may be performed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state or setting value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit up, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of lit segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the setting value change state or setting value confirmation state may be multiple, as long as the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in Figure 8-6.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a setting value abnormality error is notified using the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with a separate LED for error notification, and the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, an embodiment is exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be provided with a display monitor 207SG029. In this manner, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a display monitor 207SG029, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the setting value (or provisional setting value) in the setting value change state or setting value confirmation state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, a form is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not a new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is to be executed depending on whether or not the first movable body initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process may be determined depending on the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hit lamp 207SG132, etc., which constitute the game information display part 207SG200, are set in a state different from that during play to notify that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state. The details are not limited to this, and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hit lamp 207SG132, etc., which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, may be displayed (lit or flashing) during play if they can notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hit lamp 207SG132, etc., which constitute the game information display section 207SG200, are exemplified as a form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state by being in a state different from that during play, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "a state different from that during play" may include a different blinking cycle, brightness, or the light emission color of each segment.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control and actual operation check operation control of each movable body as the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process from the time when the performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value check start notification command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may execute non-detection operation control of each movable body from the time when the performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value check start notification command, and execute actual operation check operation control of each movable body from the time when the performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value check end notification command.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hit lamp 207SG132 constituting the game information display portion 207SG200 are lit or blinked to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state. It is not limited to this, and a notice explaining that the first special pattern display device 207SG004A, the second special pattern display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hit lamp 207SG132 are lit or flashing when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state may be provided at a specified location on the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, near the game information display unit 207SG200). This prevents arcade staff who are not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 from mistaking the lighting or flashing of the first special pattern display device 207SG004A, the second special pattern display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hit lamp 207SG132 for a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021, the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y), rather than when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 8-17 to 8-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is set to a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the large hit determination value, regardless of the game state or the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figures 8-53 (A) and 8-53 (B), the numerical range of the large hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set to be continuous with each other, regardless of the game state or the setting value.

When the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are set consecutively in this way, the reference value of the small hit judgment value can be shifted in accordance with an increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, thereby changing the numerical range of the small hit judgment value while maintaining the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Specifically, when the game state is normal or time-saving, as shown in FIG. 8-53(A), if the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1020-1237, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is set to 1238-1565 (1238 is the reference value for the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Also, if the setting value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1238-1253 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values (1020-1237), and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is set to 1254-1581 (1254 is the reference value for the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1238 to 1272 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values (1020 to 1237), and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. From then on, the common numerical range of the small hit determination values can be set in the same way even when the set value is 4 to 6.

When the game state is a probability variable state, as shown in FIG. 8-53(B), if the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1020 to 1346, and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is shifted by the amount by which the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values has increased from the normal state or time-saving state, and is set to 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the reference value of the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Also, when the setting value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1347 to 1383 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values (1020 to 1346), and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Furthermore, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set to 1347-1429 so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values (1020-1346), and the common numerical range of the small hit determination values is set to 1430-1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit determination values) so that it is continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. From then on, the common numerical range of the small hit determination values can be set in the same way even when the set value is 4-6.

As another example of setting the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination values) so that they are continuous, as shown in FIG. 8-54, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set to the range of 65,308 to 65,535 (the range of the rear end values that the hit determination value can take), and the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value (64,990 to 65,207) may be set so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit determination value. Furthermore, in this case, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set so that it is continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the probability of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on the set value by varying the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values depending on the set value.

When the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value are set as shown in FIG. 8-54, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the big hit determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 8-54, 64990 for set value 1, 64974 for set value 2, and 64954 for set value 3), and if it determines that the value of the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it further determines whether the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value, thereby determining whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. By performing the variable display determination in this manner, the variable display result can be determined without performing both the determination of whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, and therefore the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining the variable display result can be reduced.

8-53 and 8-54, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value when the set value of 1 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the non-common numerical range of the small hit determination value when the set value of 2 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the jackpot determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to include the same number of determination values in a continuous range from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the CPU 103 can determine whether to control to a jackpot gaming state or a small hit gaming state by determining whether the random number value MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Furthermore, if it is determined that the game state should be controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, the random number value MR1 can be determined to be equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value to determine whether the game state should be controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state. This reduces the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether to control the game state to a big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control the game state to a small hit game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-53, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the numerical range of the small jackpot determination value shifts according to the numerical range of the increased jackpot determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state or whether or not to control to a small jackpot gaming state within the numerical range in which the jackpot determination value number has increased, thereby reducing the processing load of the CPU 103 determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state and the processing load of determining whether or not to control to a small jackpot gaming state.

Also, in the configurations shown in Figures 8-53 and 8-54, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state based on the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, thereby reducing the processing load imposed on the CPU 103 in determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

In the configurations shown in Figures 8-53 and 8-54, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic section 207SG of the above embodiment, a form in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set consecutively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges, as shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56.

When the common and non-common numerical ranges of the jackpot determination values are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination values (common numerical range of small hit determination values) can be set to a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit determination values (32767 to 33094 in Figure 8-55, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 8-56; in both cases the reference value of the small hit determination values is 32767), which is different from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values and different from the non-common numerical range when the jackpot determination value is set to 6 (the numerical range containing the largest number of determination values in the non-common numerical range).

In the configurations shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, the reference value of the small hit determination value is the same depending on the variable special chart, but the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the small hit determination value and the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

As described above, in the configurations shown in Figs. 8-55 and 8-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the base value, regardless of the setting value. In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, in a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value), a range according to the setting value with 60000 as the base value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3, 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. For this reason, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed simply by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change in the setting value, so that the development burden of the pachinko gaming machine regarding the setting value can be reduced. Furthermore, the processing load of the CPU 103 in determining whether to control to a big win game state and whether to control to a small win game state can be reduced.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state using the same value of 60,000 as a reference value regardless of the set value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 in determining whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the form shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, as with the characteristic part 207SG described above, when the setting value is set to 1 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state based on the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, thereby reducing the processing load imposed on the CPU 103 in determining whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state.

In the form shown in FIG. 8-55 and FIG. 8-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In other words, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to a small hit gaming state using the same value of 32767 as the small hit reference value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to a small hit gaming state can be reduced.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8-55 and FIG. 8-56, a common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set when the setting value is set to 1 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to each setting value is set when the setting value is set to 2 or more in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set even when the setting value is set to 1 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set even when the setting value is set to 1 in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to the range from the reference value of 1238 to a value according to each setting value, as in FIG. 8-55 and FIG. 8-56. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the smallest when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to 1, and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is expanded as the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases, thereby varying the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state according to the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIG. 8-55 and FIG. 8-56, when the variable special chart is the first special chart, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value, while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. In other words, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value, although the number of determination values included varies depending on the variable special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to a small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value when the variable special chart is the first special chart and when it is the second special chart, as the reference value, thereby reducing the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to a small hit game state.

In the configurations shown in Figures 8-55 and 8-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to control to a big win game state based on whether the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, is within the common numerical range or non-common numerical range of the big win determination value, and determines whether to control to a small win game state based on whether the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small win determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may determine whether to control to a big win game state or a small win game state by a method other than that shown in the characteristic part 207SG. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and whether to control to a big win game state or a small win game state may be determined based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and a determination may be made as to whether or not to control the game to a big win game state or a small win game state based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum win determination value).

(Description of Characteristic Part 10F)
Next, a description will be given of the characteristic section 10F. The characteristic section 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-mentioned setting value change process and setting value confirmation process.

Figure 9-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change process in characteristic section 10F. In Figure 9-1, the same processes as those in Figure 8-32 are given the same reference numerals and will not be described. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described using Figure 9-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special pattern display device 207SG004A and the second special pattern display device 207SG004B begins (207SGSa051). Then, a process similar to that shown in Figure 8-32 is executed.

The CPU 103 also executes a process to clear the setting value change flag (207SGSa066), and then executes a game stop end process (10FS002). Details of the game stop end process will be explained using FIG. 9-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa067). Then, a process similar to that shown in FIG. 8-32 is executed.

Figure 9-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation process in characteristic section 10F. In Figure 9-2, the same processes as those in Figure 8-33 are given the same reference numerals and will not be described. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described using Figure 9-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process in Figure 9-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B begins (207SGSa101). Then, a process similar to that shown in Figure 8-33 is executed.

In addition, when the lock switch 207SG051 in 207SGSa111 is turned OFF (207SGSa111;N), the CPU 103 executes a game stop end process (10FS002). Details of the game stop end process will be explained using FIG. 9-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process in FIG. 9-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112). Then, a process similar to the process shown in FIG. 8-33 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers are used to measure the time and period related to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the plurality of timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large prize opening. The CPU 103 uses the attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the large prize opening door is opened to when it is closed. The round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big win game state. The CPU 103 uses the round interval period timer to measure the time from when the round ends to when the next round starts.

The V-lid open time timer is a timer for timing the open time of the V-lid, which is controlled to an open state and a closed state and is located in front of a specified switch (a sensor for detecting V-lid), in a V-type game machine that controls the game state after the end of a jackpot game to a certain state based on passing through a specified switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. In a V-type game machine, the V-lid is in an open state in a specified round out of multiple rounds. Such an area in which the V-lid is in an open state is called a V-winning area. The CPU 103 uses the V-lid open time timer to time the time from when the V-lid is in an open state to when it is in a closed state. The V-pass waiting time timer is a timer for timing the time of V-winning, which determines that a game ball passing through a specified switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 also determines that a game ball that passes through a specified switch after the large prize opening door of the special variable prize ball device 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state (a game ball that enters the large prize opening and passes through a specified switch just before the large prize opening door closes) is a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a V-passing waiting time timer to measure the valid period of the V prize during which a V prize is determined to be valid.

The electric chute open time timer is a timer that measures the open time when the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device), an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings, is controlled to be in the open state. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 uses the electric chute open time timer to measure the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B becomes open to when it becomes closed.

The special pattern change time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of the special pattern. The CPU 103 uses the special pattern change time timer to time the time from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the variable display of the special pattern ends. The regular pattern change time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of the regular pattern. The CPU 103 uses the regular change time timer to time the time from when the variable display of the regular pattern starts to when the variable display of the regular pattern ends.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period that notifies the player that a jackpot has been controlled at the start of the jackpot. The fanfare period is the period during which the fanfare effect is executed as an effect action that notifies the player that a jackpot game state has started, after the jackpot pattern is displayed stationary. The CPU 103 uses the fanfare time timer to measure the time from when the fanfare effect starts to when it ends.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending presentation is executed, which is the period that notifies the end of the jackpot at the end of the jackpot. The ending period is the period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is the period during which the ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 uses the ending time timer to measure the time from when the ending presentation starts to when it ends.

The CPU 103 has timers other than the timers mentioned above, such as a special pattern variable stop period timer and a regular pattern variable stop period timer. The special pattern variable stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special pattern starts. The CPU 103 uses the special pattern variable stop period timer to measure the time from when the variable display of the special pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special pattern starts. The regular pattern variable stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (e.g., 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the regular pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next regular pattern starts. The CPU 103 uses the regular pattern variable stop period timer to measure the time from when the variable display of the regular pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next regular pattern starts.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic part 10F will be described. FIG. 9-3 is a flow chart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic part 10F. The CPU 103 first judges whether the attacker release time timer is operating or not in the game stop start processing (10FS010). If the attacker release time timer is operating in 10FS010 (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS020) and the processing is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it judges whether the round interval period timer is operating or not (10FS011). If the round interval period timer is operating in 10FS011 (10FS011; Y), the operating round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020) and the processing is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not running (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V lid opening time timer is running (10FS012). If the V lid opening time timer is running at 10FS012 (10FS012; Y), the running V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not running (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passing waiting time timer is running (10FS013). If the V passing waiting time timer is running at 10FS013 (10FS013; Y), the running V passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether the electric chute opening time timer is operating (10FS014). If the electric chute opening time timer is operating at 10FS014 (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chute opening time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends. If the electric chute opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special chart fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). If the special chart fluctuation time timer is operating at 10FS015 (10FS015; Y), the operating special chart fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends.

If the special map fluctuation time timer is not running (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general map fluctuation time timer is running (10FS016). If the general map fluctuation time timer is running at 10FS016 (10FS016; Y), the running general map fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends. If the general map fluctuation time timer is not running (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is running (10FS017). If the fanfare time timer is running at 10FS017 (10FS017; Y), the running fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). If the ending time timer is running in 10FS018 (10FS018; Y), the running ending time timer is stopped (10FS020) and processing is terminated. If the ending time timer is not running (10FS018; N), it is determined whether other timers such as the special chart fluctuation stop period timer are running (10FS019). If other timers are running in 10FS019 (10FS019; Y), the other timers that are running are stopped (10FS020) and processing is terminated. If other timers are not running (10FS019; N), other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then processing is terminated.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, it includes processing to disable the launch of the ball operating handle 30, processing to disable various sensors provided at the start port, general winning port 10, out port, and passing gate 41, processing to disable the detection of various errors, processing to disable the payout of prize balls, etc. Various processing is disabled by the other processing (10FS021), resulting in a state in which the game cannot be played normally.

(Game stop termination processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the characteristic part 10F will be described. FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing the game stop end processing in the characteristic part 10F. The CPU 103 first judges whether the attacker release time timer is stopped or not in the game stop end processing (10FS030). If the attacker release time timer is stopped in 10FS030 (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040) and the processing is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it judges whether the round interval period timer is stopped or not (10FS031). If the round interval period timer is stopped in 10FS031 (10FS031; Y), the stopped round interval period timer is activated (10FS040) and the processing is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). If the V lid opening time timer is stopped at 10FS032 (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040) and processing ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). If the V passing waiting time timer is stopped at 10FS033 (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040) and processing ends.

If the V-pass waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether the electric chute opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). If the electric chute opening time timer is stopped at 10FS034 (10FS034; Y), the currently operating electric chute opening time timer is activated (10FS040) and processing ends. If the electric chute opening time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special chart fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). If the special chart fluctuation time timer is stopped at 10FS035 (10FS035; Y), the currently stopped special chart fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040) and processing ends.

If the special map fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the regular map fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). If the regular map fluctuation time timer is stopped at 10FS036 (10FS036; Y), the stopped regular map fluctuation time timer is started (10FS040) and processing ends. If the regular map fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). If the fanfare time timer is stopped at 10FS037 (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is started (10FS040) and processing ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). If the ending time timer is stopped at 10FS038 (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040) and processing ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether other timers such as the special chart fluctuation stop period timer are stopped (10FS039). If the other timers are stopped at 10FS039 (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timers are activated (10FS040) and processing ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed and then processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processes. For example, it includes a process to enable the launch of the ball operating handle 30, a process to enable various sensors provided at the start port, general winning port 10, out port, and passing gate 41, a process to enable the detection of various errors, a process to enable the payout of prize balls, etc. By the other processing (10FS041), various processes are enabled and the game is played normally.

(About the effects of the features)
As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 has been controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state, and restarts the counting of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed to the open state being subtracted in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the period of the inter-round interval timer when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval, and restarts the counting of the period of the inter-round interval timer when the setting confirmation state ends. This allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the inter-round interval being subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops timing the valid period of the V-passing waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has been entered during the valid period of the V-winning, and resumes timing the valid period of the V-passing waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the valid period of the V-winning being subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops timing the effective period of the electric chute open time timer when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and resumes timing the effective period of the electric chute open time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. In this way, the setting can be checked immediately and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where it can enter in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the special symbol variable time timer based on the fact that control has been made to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and resumes counting of the effective period of the special symbol variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting can be checked immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops timing the effective period of the normal symbol variable time timer based on the fact that control has been made to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and resumes timing the effective period of the normal symbol variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, it is possible to immediately check the setting, and it is also possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game proceeding.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the fanfare time timer when the setting confirmation state is entered while the fanfare effect is being executed, and resumes counting of the effective period of the fanfare time timer when the setting confirmation state ends. This allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending performance is being executed, and resumes counting of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting can be checked immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the ending performance being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing.

As shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the period of the special symbol variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has been entered after the variable display of the special symbol has stopped and before the next variable display starts, and resumes the counting of the period of the special symbol variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game progressing due to the period from when the variable display of the special symbol has stopped in the setting confirmation state until the next variable display starts being subtracted.

(Modifications of Characteristic Parts)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Modifications of the characteristic portion 10F will be described below.

The above describes a gaming machine (a so-called first type gaming machine) that transitions to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of a special pattern or a decorative pattern, but it may also be applied to a gaming machine (a so-called second type gaming machine) that transitions to a jackpot gaming state based on a gaming ball winning (V winning) in a special winning port (V winning port) in a special variable winning ball device (a so-called role) provided in the gaming area, or to a gaming machine that combines the first and second types (a type-two mixed machine). When a start winning in the second start winning port is detected, a jackpot determination is performed, and when the result of the determination is that a jackpot has occurred, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed, resulting in a jackpot display result, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and the same game control as for a jackpot based on a start winning in the first start winning port is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the judgment is not a big win, a small win judgment is executed, and when the result of the judgment is a small win, the variable display of the second special chart is executed, resulting in a small win display, and the game is controlled to a small win game state, and the special variable winning ball device for small wins is controlled to be in an open state for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for small wins in the small win game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, the second type big win game control is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, in which the game enters a big win game state in which the variable winning ball device for big wins is opened for a predetermined number of rounds.

In such a one-type two-type mixed machine, a small win time timer may be provided to measure the effective period during which a game ball that has entered the special winning port (V area) is judged to be valid. The CPU 103 judges that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has changed from an open state to a closed state by the small win time timer is also a winning ball within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which a winning ball is judged to be valid by the small win time timer. The CPU 103 may stop the measurement of the effective period of the small win time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled to when the small win game state is in a small win game state, and may resume the measurement of the effective period of the small win time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the control being executed in the small win game state in the setting confirmation state and the game proceeding.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls were performed for the setting confirmation state, but similar controls may also be performed for the setting change state, as shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-4. For example, the CPU 103 may stop the timing of various timers when the setting change state is entered, such as when the state is favorable to the player, and may resume the timing of various timers when the setting change state ends.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special pattern results in a jackpot display or a miss display. Specifically, when the variable display of the special pattern results in a jackpot display, the timer may be stopped based on the control being made to the setting confirmation state, and the timer may be restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. When the variable display of the special pattern results in a miss display, the timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is reached. In this way, the timer is stopped for a jackpot display result that is advantageous to the player, since it is disadvantageous to the player, but the timer is not stopped for a miss display result, since it is not disadvantageous to the player. As a method of control, it is sufficient to determine whether the current game state will result in a jackpot display result or a miss display result before the game stop start process associated with the setting value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting check is performed while the variable display of the loss display result is being executed, the timer for the special pattern variable time may not be stopped while the variable display of the loss is being executed, and the timer for the special pattern variable stop period may be stopped when the pattern stop period is reached.

The timers may be controlled differently depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the setting confirmation state is reached with a set value advantageous to the player, the various timers may be stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is reached with a set value disadvantageous to the player, the various timers may not be stopped.

(Description of the invention regarding characteristic portion 10F)
As described above, this characteristic section 10F includes the following inventions related to the above-mentioned characteristic section 10F. Conventionally, there have been pachinko gaming machines that can set one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. In such pachinko gaming machines, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it is only possible to move to the next process when all main processes currently being executed have been completed (for example, see JP 2010-200902 A).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as that disclosed in JP 2010-200902 A, when a user wishes to check the settings immediately, the user must wait until all ongoing processes are completed, making it impossible to carry out the setting check operation conveniently. To solve this problem, the characteristic part 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantageous degrees for a player in accordance with a setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value has been set;
A variable winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., an open state) that is advantageous to a player and a second state (e.g., a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) multiple times in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
A variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an attacker opening time timer) that times a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the first state, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the open state, and resumes timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding while the period during which the variable winning device has changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting check state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The game device further includes a predetermined game timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that times a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., an inter-round interval period) using an inter-round interval timer;
The specified game timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the specified game to the start of the next specified game, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and resumes timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game progressing while the time between the end of a given game and the start of the next given game being subtracted in the setting check state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A specific area (e.g., a V-winning area) provided within the variable winning device into which the game medium can enter;
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the game medium to a special state (e.g., a probability variable state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium entering the specific area;
and a specific time measuring means (e.g., a CPU 103 that measures time using a V passage waiting time timer) for measuring a valid period (e.g., a valid period for a V prize) during which the game medium that has entered the specific area is determined to be valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the valid period for a V prize has arrived),
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the specified condition is met, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of a V winning, and resumes timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the effective period being subtracted when a certain condition is met during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (3),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41) and deriving and displaying a display result;
A normal variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B) that becomes in a state in which a game medium can enter (e.g., an open state) for a predetermined period of time when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., a normal winning ball);
Further provided is a normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an electric chute opening time timer) that times a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in an entry-enabled state, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, and resumes timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding when the normal variable winning means is ready to enter during the setting check state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (4),
A variable display of identification information (e.g., a special symbol) is performed, and when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) is derived, the device is controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state);
Further provided is a variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special chart variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the identification information being executed during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (5),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) and deriving a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41);
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a normal variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information is provided,
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal patterns is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the normal identification information being displayed variably during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(7) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (6),
A start notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising a start notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification performance,
The start notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the start notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when a fanfare performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the start notification effect being executed while the settings are being checked, causing the game to proceed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (7),
An end notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (e.g., an ending effect) that notifies the user of the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising an end notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification performance,
The end notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the end notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the ending performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the end notification being executed while the settings are being checked.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (8),
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (e.g., a small win game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (e.g., a small win display result);
A special winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) into which the game medium can enter in the special state;
A special area (e.g., a special winning port) is provided in the special winning device and into which the game medium can enter;
Based on the game medium entering the special area, the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
The game device further includes a special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a small win time timer) for timing a valid period during which the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is determined to be valid;
The special timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when in a small win game state, and resumes timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding in a special state while the settings are being checked.

(Description of the invention regarding characteristic portion 11F)
The feature 11F may include the invention shown below. Conventionally, there have been pachinko gaming machines that can set one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. In such pachinko gaming machines, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, the machine could only move to the next process when all main processes currently being executed were completed (see, for example, JP 2010-200902 A).

However, in the case of gaming machines such as those disclosed in JP 2010-200902 A, when a user wishes to check the settings immediately, the user must wait until all ongoing processes are completed, making it impossible to carry out the setting check operation conveniently. To solve this problem, characteristic unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantageous degrees for a player in accordance with a setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value has been set;
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41) and deriving and displaying a display result;
A normal variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B) that becomes in a state in which a game medium can enter (e.g., an open state) for a predetermined period of time when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., a normal winning ball);
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an electric chute opening time timer) is provided to measure the period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in an entry-enabled state, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, and resumes timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding when the normal variable winning means is ready to enter during the setting check state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., an open state) that is advantageous to a player and a second state (e.g., a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) multiple times in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
A variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an attacker release time timer) that times the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the first state, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the open state, and resumes timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding while the period during which the variable winning device has changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting check state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The game device further includes a predetermined game timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that times a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., an inter-round interval period) using an inter-round interval timer;
The specified game timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the specified game to the start of the next specified game, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and resumes timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game progressing while the time between the end of a given game and the start of the next given game being subtracted in the setting check state.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
A specific area (e.g., a V-winning area) provided within the variable winning device into which the game medium can enter;
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the game medium to a special state (e.g., a probability variable state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium entering the specific area;
and a specific time measuring means (e.g., a CPU 103 that measures time using a V passage waiting time timer) for measuring a valid period (e.g., a valid period for a V prize) during which the game medium that has entered the specific area is determined to be valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the valid period for a V prize has arrived),
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the specified condition is met, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of a V winning, and resumes timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the effective period being subtracted when a certain condition is met during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (4),
A variable display of identification information (e.g., a special symbol) is performed, and when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) is derived, the device is controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state);
Further provided is a variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special chart variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the identification information being executed during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (5),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) and deriving a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41);
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a normal variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information is provided,
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal patterns is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the normal identification information being displayed variably during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(7) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (6),
A start notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising a start notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification performance,
The start notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the start notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when a fanfare performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the start notification effect being executed while the settings are being checked, causing the game to proceed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (7),
An end notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (e.g., an ending effect) that notifies the user of the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising an end notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification performance,
The end notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the end notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the ending performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the end notification being executed while the settings are being checked.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (8),
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (e.g., a small win game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (e.g., a small win display result);
A special winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) into which the game medium can enter in the special state;
A special area (e.g., a special winning port) is provided in the special winning device and into which the game medium can enter;
Based on the game medium entering the special area, the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
The game device further includes a special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a small win time timer) for timing a valid period during which the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is determined to be valid;
The special timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when in a small win game state, and resumes timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding in a special state while the settings are being checked.

(Description of the invention regarding the characteristic portion 12F)
The feature section 12F may include the invention shown below. Conventionally, there have been pachinko gaming machines that can set one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. In such pachinko gaming machines, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, the next process can only be started when all main processes currently being executed have been completed (for example, see JP 2010-200902 A).

However, in the case of gaming machines such as those disclosed in JP 2010-200902 A, when a user wishes to check the settings immediately, the user must wait until all ongoing processes are completed, making it impossible to carry out the setting check operation conveniently. To solve this problem, characteristic unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when a specific display is derived as a result,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantageous degrees for a player in accordance with a setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value has been set;
A variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special pattern variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special pattern),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the identification information being executed during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., an open state) that is advantageous to a player and a second state (e.g., a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) multiple times in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
A variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an attacker release time timer) that times the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the first state, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the open state, and resumes timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding while the period during which the variable winning device has changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting check state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further provided with a stop timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special chart variable stop period timer) for timing a period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled to between the time when the variable display of the identification information has stopped and the time when the next variable display starts, and resumes timing the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing the period of the special pattern variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled to the setting confirmation state between the time when the variable display of the special pattern has stopped and the time when the next variable display starts, and resumes timing the period of the special pattern variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by subtracting the time from when the variable display of the identification information stops in the setting check state until the next variable display starts, causing the game to proceed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The game device further includes a predetermined game timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that times a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., an inter-round interval period) using an inter-round interval timer;
The specified game timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the specified game to the start of the next specified game, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and resumes timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game progressing while the time between the end of a given game and the start of the next given game being subtracted in the setting check state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described above in (2) to (4),
A specific area (e.g., a V-winning area) provided within the variable winning device into which the game medium can enter;
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the game medium to a special state (e.g., a probability variable state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium entering the specific area;
and a specific time measuring means (e.g., a CPU 103 that measures time using a V passage waiting time timer) for measuring a valid period (e.g., a valid period for a V prize) during which the game medium that has entered the specific area is determined to be valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the valid period for a V prize has arrived),
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the specified condition is met, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of a V winning, and resumes timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the effective period being subtracted when a certain condition is met during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (5),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41) and deriving and displaying a display result;
A normal variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B) that becomes in a state in which a game medium can enter (e.g., an open state) for a predetermined period of time when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., a normal winning ball);
Further provided is a normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an electric chute opening time timer) that times a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in an entry-enabled state, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, and resumes timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding when the normal variable winning means is ready to enter during the setting check state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (6),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) and deriving a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41);
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a normal variable display time timer) is provided to time the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal patterns is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the normal identification information being displayed variably during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(8) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (7),
A start notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising a start notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification performance,
The start notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the start notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when a fanfare performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the start notification effect being executed while the settings are being checked, causing the game to proceed.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (8),
An end notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (e.g., an ending effect) that notifies the user of the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising an end notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification performance,
The end notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the end notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the ending performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the end notification being executed while the settings are being checked.

(10) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (9),
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (e.g., a small win game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (e.g., a small win display result);
A special winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) into which the game medium can enter in the special state;
A special area (e.g., a special winning port) is provided in the special winning device and into which the game medium can enter;
Based on the game medium entering the special area, the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
The game device further includes a special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a small win time timer) for timing a valid period during which the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is determined to be valid;
The special timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when in a small win game state, and resumes timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding in a special state while the settings are being checked.

(Description of the invention regarding characteristic portion 13F)
The feature section 13F may include the invention shown below. Conventionally, there have been pachinko gaming machines that can set one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. In such pachinko gaming machines, in the setting confirmation process for checking the setting value, the machine could only move to the next process when all main processes currently being executed were completed (see, for example, JP 2010-200902 A).

However, in the case of gaming machines such as those disclosed in JP 2010-200902 A, when a user wishes to check the settings immediately, the user must wait until all ongoing processes are completed, making it impossible to carry out the setting check operation conveniently. To solve this problem, feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when a specific display result is derived,
A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting value change process) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantageous degrees for a player in accordance with a setting change operation;
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change value confirmation process) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value has been set;
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) and deriving a display result based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41);
A normal variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a normal variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information;
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable display of normal patterns is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the normal pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the variable display of normal identification information being executed during the setting check state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., an open state) that is advantageous to a player and a second state (e.g., a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) multiple times in which the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
A variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an attacker release time timer) that times the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the first state, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when changing to the open state, and resumes timing of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding while the period during which the variable winning device has changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting check state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further provided with a stop timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special chart variable stop period timer) for timing a period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is entered after the variable display of the identification information has stopped and before the next variable display starts, and resumes timing the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing the period of the special pattern variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is entered after the variable display of the special pattern has stopped and before the next variable display starts, and resumes timing the period of the special pattern variable stop period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the setting to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by subtracting the time from when the variable display of the identification information stops in the setting check state until the next variable display starts, causing the game to proceed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The game device further includes a predetermined game timing means (e.g., a CPU 103 that times a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., an inter-round interval period) using an inter-round interval timer;
The specified game timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the specified game to the start of the next specified game, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and resumes timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game progressing while the time between the end of a given game and the start of the next given game being subtracted in the setting check state.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described above in (2) to (4),
A specific area (e.g., a V-winning area) provided within the variable winning device into which the game medium can enter;
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the game medium to a special state (e.g., a probability variable state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium entering the specific area;
and a specific time measuring means (e.g., a CPU 103 that measures time using a V passage waiting time timer) that measures a valid period (e.g., a valid period of a V prize) during which the game medium that has entered the specific area is determined to be valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., the valid period of a V prize has arrived),
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the specified condition is met, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of a V winning, and resumes timing of the valid period of the V passing waiting time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the effective period being subtracted when a certain condition is met during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (5),
A normal variable display means (e.g., the CPU 103) for variably displaying normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols) based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (e.g., the passing gate 41) and deriving and displaying a display result;
A normal variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B) that becomes in a state in which a game medium can enter (e.g., an open state) for a predetermined period of time when the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (e.g., a normal winning ball);
Further provided with a normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times by an electric chute opening time timer) that times the period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in an entry-enabled state, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, and resumes timing of the effective period of the electric chute opening time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding when the normal variable winning means is ready to enter during the setting check state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (6),
A variable display of identification information (e.g., a special symbol) is performed, and when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) is derived, the device is controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state);
Further provided is a variable display timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a special chart variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information;
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the state is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the special pattern variable time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the variable display of the identification information being executed during the setting check state and the game proceeding.

(8) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (7),
A start notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (e.g., a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising a start notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a fanfare time timer) for timing the execution period of the start notification performance,
The start notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the start notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when a fanfare performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the start notification effect being executed while the settings are being checked, causing the game to proceed.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (8),
An end notification effect execution means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (e.g., an ending effect) that notifies the user of the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period of time;
Further comprising an end notification performance timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times an ending time timer) for timing the execution period of the end notification performance,
The end notification performance timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state when the end notification performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state when the ending performance is being executed, and resumes timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding due to the end notification being executed while the settings are being checked.

(10) In any one of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (9),
A special state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (e.g., a small win game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (e.g., a small win display result);
A special winning device (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) into which the game medium can enter in the special state;
A special area (e.g., a special winning port) is provided in the special winning device and into which the game medium can enter;
Based on the game medium entering the special area, the game is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
The game device further includes a special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 that times a small win time timer) for timing a valid period during which the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is determined to be valid;
The special timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and resumes timing of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, CPU 103 stops timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when in a small win game state, and resumes timing of the valid period of the small win time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

This configuration allows the settings to be checked immediately, and prevents the player from being put at a disadvantage by the game proceeding in a special state while the settings are being checked.

(Description of Characteristic Part 40F)
Next, the characteristic part 40F will be described. The characteristic part 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the performance control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. During the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, noise due to static electricity or the like may occur. In such a case, there is a possibility that the performance control command is unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 10-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation control command in the characteristic part 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 10-1, some presentation control commands are added to the list of presentation control commands shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) described above. The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning time judgment results such as the jackpot type judgment and the fluctuation pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Among them, command F1XXH is a pattern designation command that indicates whether or not a winning time judgment result is a jackpot and the judgment result of the type of the jackpot among the winning time judgment results. In addition, command F2XXH is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result (the judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type) of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls into among the winning time judgment results.

The various performance control commands shown in FIG. 10-1 are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103. Upon receiving the various performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 executes various processes. Some of the various processes executed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the performance control commands will be explained below.

(Regarding processing based on fluctuation pattern specification commands)
The performance control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing a variation display of the displayed decorative pattern. Also, in response to the variation display of the special pattern, a constant small pattern that is a reduced version of the decorative pattern may be provided on the image display device 5. In such a case, the performance control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing a variation display of the constant small pattern that is displayed.

(Regarding processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
A fourth pattern may be provided as a fourth pattern following the decorative pattern, the special pattern, and the normal pattern as a pattern for performing a variable display. The fourth pattern is displayed as a pattern indicating that the special pattern (first and second special patterns) is variable, for example, by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. By displaying the fourth pattern in a variable manner, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being displayed in a variable manner even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when a performance is performed in which the movable body covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs a variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable start command.

(Regarding processing based on the command specifying when the big prize gate is open)
During a jackpot game, a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. Between round games, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to a closed state (second state), making it difficult for the game ball to win the large prize opening. The performance control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open. Also, based on receiving a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, the performance control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to update the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state.

(Regarding processing based on the first start port winning designation command and the second start port winning designation command)
The performance control CPU 120, based on receiving the first start port winning designation command, operates the image display device 5 to display a hold display corresponding to the first hold information stored in the performance control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Also, the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving the second start port winning designation command, operates the image display device 5 to display a hold display corresponding to the second hold information stored in the performance control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122.

(Regarding processing based on the design specification command and the variable type specification command)
The CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs a flash effect at the time of winning or a reserve change effect at the time of winning based on the reception of the designation command or the variation type designation command. The flash effect at the time of winning is an effect in which a lamp provided around the first starting port is illuminated when a start winning occurs. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance draws a lottery for the flash effect at the time of winning based on the expectation of a big win using the reserved information by the designation command or the variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamp lights up in different modes according to the expectation. Specifically, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes control such that the lamp lights up in red for a high expectation of a big win, lights up in white for a low expectation, and does not light up in the case of a loss in the lottery or a loss variation without a reach. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance also outputs a sound according to the expectation along with the flash effect at the time of winning. It is also possible to control the light to be emitted only without outputting a sound.

The winning reserve change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the reserve display that is displayed when a start winning occurs to a different mode from normal. The effect control CPU 120 draws a lottery for the winning reserve change effect based on the jackpot expectation degree using the reserve information from the pattern designation command and the variation type designation command. If the lottery is won, the reserve display at the time of winning is displayed in a different mode from the normal mode. Specifically, the reserve display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order of the highest jackpot expectation degree, and the reserve display is displayed in the normal mode of white in the case of a loss in the lottery or a loss variation that does not involve a reach. The effect control CPU 120 also outputs a sound according to the expectation degree along with the winning reserve change effect. Note that it is also possible to control so that sound is not output when only the reserve change occurs.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a winning flash performance by controlling the lamp to light up based on receiving a symbol designation command or a change type designation command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 executes a winning reserve change performance by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving a symbol designation command or a change type designation command. Note that only one of the winning flash performance or the winning reserve change performance may be executed. Also, when a prize is won, a performance indicating the expectation level may be executed by only outputting a sound.

Next, the main processing for controlling presentation executed in characteristic section 40F will be described. Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing the main processing for controlling presentation in characteristic section 40F. In Figure 10-2, the same processes as in Figure 8-43 are given the same reference numerals and some of the explanations will be omitted. In Figure 10-2, the processes related to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in Figure 8-43 have been deleted, and a sub-side game stop process has been added after 207SGS412.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). If a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up in a setting value change state or a setting value confirmation state, a setting value related notification process is executed to notify that a setting value is being changed (setting value change notification) or that a setting value is being confirmed (setting value confirmation notification) (207SGS412). In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that a setting value is being changed or a notification image indicating that a setting value is being confirmed is displayed.

After executing the setting value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop process, if a presentation control command is sent from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a process to stop the game. Details of the sub-side game stop process are explained in Figure 10-3.

After the sub-side game stop process is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check end notification command has been received (207SGS416). If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check end notification command has not been received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value check end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Figure 10-3 is a flowchart showing the sub-side game stop processing in characteristic section 40F executed in 40FS001. The performance control CPU 120 stores the performance control commands sent by CPU 103 from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 in a performance control command receiving buffer provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then analyzes the commands stored in the performance control command receiving buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the presentation control CPU 120 checks the presentation control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. If it is determined that the first variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the presentation control CPU 120 can prevent the control of operating the image display device 5 to perform the variation display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. If it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. If it is determined that the second variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can avoid executing control to operate the image display device 5 to display the variation of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the image display device 5 from operating to perform control of the decorative pattern variation display or the constant small pattern variation display. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a command to specify that the large prize opening is open has been received. If it is determined that a command to specify that the large prize opening is open has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. If it is determined that a command to specify that the large prize opening is open has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the command to specify that the large prize opening is open during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the image display device 5 from operating to update the display of the number of rounds during the large prize game state. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning port designation command has been received. If it is determined that the first start winning port designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. If it is determined that the first start winning port designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the first start winning port designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the pending display of the first pending information caused by operating the image display device 5 from being displayed. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning port designation command has been received. If it is determined that the second start winning port designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. If it is determined that the second start winning port designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the second start winning port designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the pending display of the second pending information caused by operating the image display device 5 from being displayed. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received. If it is determined that a symbol designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. If it is determined that a symbol designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning, which is controlled by lighting the lamp, from being executed. In addition, by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the hold change effect at the time of winning, which is executed by operating the image display device 5, from being executed. Then, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a change type designation command has been received. If it is determined that a change type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. If it is determined that a change type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). By discarding the change type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the flash effect at the time of winning, which is controlled by lighting the lamp, from being executed. In addition, by discarding the change type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent the hold change effect at the time of winning, which is executed by operating the image display device 5, from being executed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether a test command has been received. Here, a test command is a command that is sent directly to the performance control board 12 from a device that sends commands to check the screen state and the state of the gimmicks, which are installed in the gaming machine at the time of shipment from the factory, etc. When sending a test command, various test commands are sent with a transmitting device dedicated to sending test commands connected to the performance control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that a test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that a test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the performance control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to display a specified check screen based on the reception of a test command to check the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In this way, processing based on the reception of a test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. Then, the processing ends.

At 40FS019, the performance control CPU 120 checks the performance control command receiving buffer and determines whether any other command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands such as those shown in FIG. 10-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). By discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the performance control CPU 120 can prevent a specified performance means such as the image display device 5 from executing a performance. Then, the processing ends.

(About the effects of the features)
As shown in Fig. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled in the setting change state, even if it receives a variation pattern designation command, it discards the variation pattern designation command and does not execute control based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. In this way, it is possible to prevent a predetermined performance means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives a variation pattern designation command, it discards the variation pattern designation command and does not execute control based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified performance means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled in the setting change state, even if it receives the first and second fluctuation start commands, it discards the first and second fluctuation start commands and does not execute control based on the reception of the first and second fluctuation start commands. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified performance means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the first and second fluctuation start commands, it discards the first and second fluctuation start commands and does not execute control based on the reception of the first and second fluctuation start commands. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified performance means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled in the setting change state, even if it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, the CPU 120 discards the command and does not execute control based on the reception of the command. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified performance means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the presentation control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, the CPU 120 discards the command and does not execute control based on the reception of the command. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified presentation means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in Figure 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if it receives the first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command, it discards the first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command, and therefore does not execute control based on the reception of the first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command.
In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of a predetermined presentation means such as the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the presentation control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if it receives the first start winning port designation command or the second start winning port designation command, it discards the first start winning port designation command or the second start winning port designation command, and does not execute control based on the reception of the first start winning port designation command or the second start winning port designation command. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specified presentation means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, it discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command, and therefore does not execute control based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. In this way, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the specified performance means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, it discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command, and therefore does not execute control based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command. In this way, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the specified performance means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, the performance control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command, such as 40FS021. In this way, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a specific performance means such as the image display device 5, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, since no information remains as the received command is discarded, no erroneous command remains even when the setting change state or setting confirmation state ends, and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, a setting is made such that an image is displayed to notify the user that the device is in a setting change state upon receiving a setting value change start notification command, and an image is displayed to notify the user that the device is in a setting confirmation state upon receiving a setting value confirmation start notification command. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the device is in a setting change state or setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of a predetermined presentation means such as the image display device 5 even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

As shown in 40FS020 in FIG. 10-3, even when controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, even when controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute the operation of a predetermined performance means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Modifications of Characteristic Parts)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Modifications of the characteristic portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it analyzes the performance control command receiving buffer for each command sent. However, instead of analyzing the commands in order and discarding them one by one, it is also possible to discard all the commands stored in the performance control command receiving buffer when a predetermined condition is met. For example, based on the end of the setting change state, the CPU 103 may transmit an initialization command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, it is also possible to discard all the commands stored in the performance control command receiving buffer.
Also, even in the setting confirmation state, all commands stored in the performance control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of a specified command.

In the above-described embodiment, a case was described in which, when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a performance control command other than a command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, processing based on the performance control command is not executed. However, processing based on the reception of a performance control command when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be executed internally. Even in such a case, the control executed when controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of other performance control commands, so that an image based on the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in appearance. Note that, with regard to sound, when in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is sufficient to mute channels other than the channel that outputs the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the received command was executed when the device was controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, when the device is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the device may not analyze the command even if it is received.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp that appears when a prize is won were described as the predetermined presentation means operated by the presentation control CPU 120 when a presentation control command is received. However, the predetermined presentation means may be anything that is executed by the presentation control means 120 based on receiving a command. For example, the predetermined presentation means may be an operating means operated by the player or a movable member provided on the gaming machine. In such a case, when the operating means vibrates or the movable member moves in response to receiving a predetermined command, control may be executed to discard the command even if a command to perform these actions is received during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, during the setting change state or setting confirmation state, control may be performed so that commands other than commands for terminating the setting change state or setting confirmation state, such as a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, are not received.

In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided on the gaming machine may be illuminated or a sound may be output from a speaker in addition to the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, when a command related to the lamp or speaker is received, the command may be discarded so that these presentation means do not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, a preview performance is executed based on receiving a pattern designation command or a variation type command. However, the preview performance may be executed by receiving either one of the commands, or, if a command related to a variation pattern command is sent due to the occurrence of a start winning, the preview performance may be executed based on the command related to the variation pattern. In such a case, even if a command related to a variation pattern is received during a setting change state or during a setting confirmation state, the command can simply be discarded.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, a lottery may be performed for the prediction to be executed based on the reception of a pattern designation command or a variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various predictions may not be executed by determining that the prediction cannot be executed at the timing of determining whether or not the prediction can actually be executed. Also, when executing a pre-reading prediction performance in continuous variation display other than when a prize is won, a lottery may be performed for the prediction based on the reception of a pattern designation command or a variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has ended at the timing when the prediction actually starts, a prediction based on the received command may be executed.

In the embodiment described above, a case was described in which a received command is discarded during the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001. However, the timing for discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that a setting value change completion notification command or a setting value confirmation completion notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, if multiple irregular commands have been received, the commands can be discarded all at once.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, if an irregular command is received once during a setting change state or during a setting confirmation state, restrictions may be imposed so that another irregular command is not received thereafter.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration of the characteristic portion may be combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other characteristic portions as appropriate. The combined characteristic portions or individual uncombined characteristic portions may be combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other characteristic portions as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

[Explanation regarding characteristic portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. In this embodiment, as described above (the characteristic part 207SG), in a game machine that can change the set value, the ratio of the selected variation pattern is different according to the number of variation display that is executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, high base state).

(Display result judgment)
11-1 is a diagram showing an example of a display result judgment table to be referred to in a low probability state. As shown in FIG. 11-1(A) to (F), a display result judgment table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 executes a jackpot judgment by referring to the display result judgment table corresponding to the set set value (any of 1 to 6).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes according to the setting value. More specifically, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. In other words, when the setting value is set to 6, it is most advantageous for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantageous rate in stages.

The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value is set to be compared with MR1, which is a random number value for judging the special symbol display result. Each display result judgment table has a judgment value set to determine a big hit for each of the cases where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 1 (first), i.e., the first special symbol is the target for variable display, and where the variable special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), i.e., the second special symbol is the target for variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(A), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 1 at low probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, that is, if the first special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/199.8) than when the setting values are "2," "3," "4," "5," and "6." Also, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even if the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/199.8).

As shown in FIG. 11-1(B), when using a display result judgment table corresponding to setting value 2 during non-probability bonus, if the variable special designation buffer is set to 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/188.3) than when the setting value is "1." Also, when the variable special designation buffer is set to 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special designation is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special designation is the target of variable display (1/188.3).

As shown in FIG. 11-1(C), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 3 at low probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/178.1) than when the setting values are "1" and "2." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/178.1).

As shown in FIG. 11-1(D), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 4 at low probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/164.7) than when the setting values are "1," "2," and "3." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/164.7).

As shown in FIG. 11-1(E), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 5 at low probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/149.3) than when the setting values are "1," "2," "3," and "4." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same (1/149.3) as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-1(F), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 6 at low probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/134.0) than when the setting values are "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/134.0).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is about to start in the low probability state, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit judgment values corresponding to the jackpot shown in Figures 11-1 (A) to (F), it decides that the special symbol will be a jackpot. In other words, it decides whether or not to win a jackpot with a probability according to the setting value. Note that the "probability" shown in Figures 11-1 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot. Also, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state, but also means deciding whether or not to make the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B a jackpot symbol.

Figure 11-2 shows an example of a display result determination table that is referenced in a high probability state. As shown in Figures 11-2 (A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided, and the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the display result determination table corresponding to the set setting value (any of 1 to 6).

As shown in FIG. 11-2(A), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 1 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/50) than when the setting values are "2," "3," "4," "5," and "6." Also, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is the first, and even if the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same (1/50) as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(B), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 2 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/47.1) than when the setting value is "1." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/47.1).

As shown in FIG. 11-2(C), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 3 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/44.5) than when the setting values are "1" and "2." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display (1/44.5).

As shown in FIG. 11-2(D), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 4 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/41.2) than when the setting values are "1," "2," and "3." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same (1/41.2) as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(E), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 5 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/37.3) than when the setting values are "1," "2," "3," and "4." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same (1/37.3) as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(F), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 6 at high probability, if the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/33.5) than when the setting values are "1," "2," "3," "4," and "5." Also, when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 2, the same judgment value corresponding to a jackpot is set as when the variable special pattern designation buffer is 1, and even when the second special pattern is the target of variable display, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same (1/33.5) as when the first special pattern is the target of variable display.

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is about to start in the high probability state, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot shown in Figures 11-2 (A) to (F), it determines that the special symbol will be a jackpot. In other words, it determines whether or not a jackpot will be won based on the probability according to the setting value. Note that the "probability" shown in Figures 14-2 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred using the display result determination table shown in Figures 11-1 and 11-2, but a separate jackpot determination table may be provided, and the jackpot determination may be performed using a common table for both the first special pattern variable display and the second special pattern variable display, without relying on the variable special pattern designation buffer.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values, from 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with two, three, four, five, or seven or more setting values.

(Jackpot type determination)
FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 11-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(A) is a table when a jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(B) is a table when a jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", "10R normal jackpot [50 times]", "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", "3R special jackpot [next time]", "5R special jackpot [next time]", and "10R special jackpot [next time]", based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Here, the types of jackpots in the characteristic section 21TM of this embodiment will be explained. In the characteristic section 21TM of this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to a "normal jackpot" (also called a non-variable jackpot), in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, and the game transitions to a low probability/high base state, and a "variable jackpot", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game ends, and the game transitions to a high probability/high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from a "3R jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated three times (so-called 3 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the jackpot game state resulting from a "5R jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state resulting from a "10R jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that is repeated ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "normal jackpot [50 times]" ends when a specified number of special game games (in this example, 50 times) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played, and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "normal jackpot [100 times]" ends when a specified number of special game games (in this example, 100 times) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

On the other hand, the high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of "high probability jackpot [next]" will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is of the type of "3R high probability jackpot [next]", "5R high probability jackpot [next]", or "10R high probability jackpot [next]", the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

For example, the jackpot game state by "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player three times (so-called 3 rounds), and the game state transitions to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot game state ends, and the time-saving control that is executed thereafter is a jackpot type that ends when a specified number of special game games (50 times in this example) are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before the specified number of special game games are played. Also, the jackpot game state by "10R certainty jackpot [next time]" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player ten times (so-called 10 rounds), and the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state after the jackpot game state ends, and the high probability control and time-saving control that are executed thereafter are a jackpot type that continues to be executed until a jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in the characteristic section 21TM of this embodiment, an example is shown in which nine types of jackpot types are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and eight or less types of jackpot types, or ten or more types of jackpot types may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range of 0 to 299 for MR2 judgment values, 0 to 176 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R special jackpot [next time]", 291 to 293 are assigned to "5R special jackpot [next time]", and 294 to 299 are assigned to "10R special jackpot [next time]". Also, when the setting value is "2" to "6", out of the range of 0 to 299 for MR2 judgment values, the same judgment values as when the setting value is "1" are assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range of 0 to 299 for MR2 judgment values, 0 to 134 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", 165 to 179 are assigned to "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", 180 to 203 are assigned to "3R special jackpot [next time]", 204 to 263 are assigned to "5R special jackpot [next time]", and 294 to 299 are assigned to "10R special jackpot [next time]". When the setting value is "2" to "6", out of the range of 0 to 299 for MR2 judgment values, the same judgment values as when the setting value is "1" are assigned.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in a special game with a first special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the jackpot type judgment table, regardless of which setting value is set. Similarly, when a jackpot occurs in a special game with a second special symbol, a common judgment value is assigned in the jackpot type judgment table, regardless of which setting value is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state may be controlled to a low probability state and low base state (low probability/low base state: normal state), a low probability state and high base state (low probability/high base state: time-saving state), or a high probability state and high base state (high probability/high base state: probability change state).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the display of the first special symbol, the rate at which the next jackpot occurs within 50 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the jackpot game when the high setting value is used is higher than the rate at which the next jackpot occurs within 50 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the jackpot game when the low setting value is used. Also, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the display of the first special symbol, the rate at which the next jackpot game enters 51 fluctuations or later (second period) without the next jackpot occurring after the end of the jackpot game when the high setting value is used is lower than the rate at which the next jackpot game enters 51 fluctuations or later (second period) without the next jackpot occurring after the end of the jackpot game when the low setting value is used.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the display of the second special symbol, the rate at which the next jackpot occurs within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the jackpot game when the high setting value is used is higher than the rate at which the next jackpot occurs within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the jackpot game when the low setting value is used. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the display of the second special symbol, the rate at which the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game without the next jackpot occurring when the high setting value is used is lower than the rate at which the next jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game without the next jackpot occurring when the low setting value is used.

(Relationship between game state, performance symbols, and performance modes)
First, the relationship between each game state (low probability/low base state: normal state, low probability/high base state: time-saving state, high probability/high base state: probability change state), each performance pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, second small pattern), and each performance mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVER ZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, a pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is displayed in the upper right and upper left parts of the image display device 5 and indicates whether or not the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special pattern is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small pattern can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special pattern, and the stop display of the small pattern can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special pattern. The areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the first small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed in a variable and stationary manner are referred to as, from left, the first small pattern display area 5l1, the first small pattern display area 5c1, and the first small pattern display area 5r1, and the areas in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the second small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed in a variable and stationary manner are referred to as, from left, the second small pattern display area 5l2, the second small pattern display area 5c2, and the second small pattern display area 5r2.

The first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 have a smaller display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 have a smaller display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Figure 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to the game state. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are cases where the decorative symbol display is executed in response to the first special symbol display, and cases where the decorative symbol display is executed in response to the second special symbol display, and which of the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display the decorative symbol display is executed in response to varies depending on the game state.

As described above, the game states in this embodiment include a low probability/low base state (sometimes referred to as a normal state), a low probability/high base state (sometimes referred to as a time-saving state), and a high probability/high base state (sometimes referred to as a probability-changing state). When the game state is controlled to (i) a low probability/low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to (ii) a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), or (iii) a high probability/high base state (probability-changing state), in either case, the decorative symbol corresponds to the second special symbol.

In other words, in the case of (i), the decorative pattern and the first small pattern are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the second small pattern is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, but in the cases of (ii) to (iii), the decorative pattern and the second small pattern are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern, and the first small pattern is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern. In the following explanation, "Special pattern 1" in the figure refers to the first special pattern, and "Special pattern 2" in the figure refers to the second special pattern.

Figure 11-4 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the game state is a low probability/low base state (normal state), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol correspond to the first special symbol, and the second small symbol corresponds to the second special symbol. Also, Figure 11-1 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol correspond to the second special symbol, and the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol. Also, Figures 11-4 (C1) and (C2) are respectively diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the image display device 5 when the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol correspond to the second special symbol, and the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, a first hold display area 21TM011 is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, which displays the first hold memory number (first hold display 21TM010, 0 to 4), and a second hold display area 21TM021 is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, which displays the second hold memory number (second hold display 21TM020, 0 to 4). In addition, an active display area 21TM031 is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5, which displays an active display 21TM030, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed.

Furthermore, the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 21TM011) is provided with a first pending memory number special display area 21TM015 that displays the first pending memory number, and the right part of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending display area 21TM021) is provided with a second pending memory number special display area 21TM025 that displays the second pending memory number. As described above, the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first small pattern display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 that displays a first small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a second small pattern display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 that displays a second small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

Here, the first pending display area 21TM011 displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the first pending memory number, and the second pending display area 21TM021 displays a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the second pending memory number. In contrast, the first pending memory number special display area 21TM015 displays the first pending memory number as a numerical value, and the second pending memory number special display area 21TM025 displays the second pending memory number as a numerical value. The display range of objects in the first pending display area 21TM011 is wider than the display range of numerical values in the first pending memory number special display area 21TM015, and the first pending memory number is displayed with higher visibility in the first pending display area 21TM011 than in the first pending memory number special display area 21TM015. In addition, the display range of objects in the second pending display area 21TM021 is wider than the display range of numbers in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025, and the second pending memory count is displayed with higher visibility in the second pending display area 21TM021 than in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025.

In addition, when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the first pending display area 21TM011 displays a number of objects corresponding to the first pending memory number, but when the game state is either (ii) low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or (iii) high probability/high base state (probability change state), the objects themselves are not displayed. In this way, the first pending display area 21TM011 displays objects equivalent to the first pending memory number according to the game state. On the other hand, the first pending memory number special display area 21TM015 displays the first pending memory number regardless of the game state (even when the game state is any of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, even when a game state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which no objects are displayed in the first pending display area 21TM011, the player can know the first pending memory count by checking the first pending memory count special display area 21TM015.

In addition, when the game state is either (ii) low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or (iii) high probability/high base state (probability change state), the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays a number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number, but when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. In this way, the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays objects equivalent to the second reserved memory number depending on the game state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 displays the second reserved memory number regardless of the game state (even when the game state is (i)). Therefore, even when the game state (i) in which no objects are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by checking the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025.

In addition, the active display area 21TM031 is configured to display an object corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern that correspond to the decorative pattern, regardless of the game state.

The example shown in FIG. 11-4(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the presentation mode is controlled to the normal mode by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" showing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory count is 3 and the second reserved memory count is 0, the first special pattern change display is executed. Also, the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015 displays "3", the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays "0", and three first reserved displays 21TM010 are displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011. Also, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the decorative pattern change display (first special pattern change display). In addition, the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, and since the previously executed (most recently executed) second special pattern display result was a "miss," the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) combination (in this example, "245") indicating that the display result is a "miss" is continuously displayed in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

The example shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state). When the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode called "Chance Time". When the presentation mode is "Chance Time", an "evening image" showing an evening landscape including an evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the words "Chance Time" are displayed at the top of the screen.

In this example, when the first reserved memory count is 0 and the second reserved memory count is 3, the second special pattern change display is executed. Also, the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015 displays "0", the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays "3", and three second reserved displays 21TM020 are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. Also, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the decorative pattern change display (second special pattern change display). In addition, the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern, which is a sub-pattern) is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. In response to the result of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special pattern display being a "miss," the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) combination (in this example, "134") indicating that the result of the display is a "miss" is continuously displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, and the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

Figures 11-4 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state). As shown in Figure 11-4 (C1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time" as when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) until a predetermined number of special chart games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) are played after the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state, or until the game state becomes a jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special chart games are played. As described above, when the presentation mode is "chance time", an "evening image" showing an evening landscape including an evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the words "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C2), after the game state transitions to the high probability/high base state, if a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100) are executed without entering a jackpot game state, the display mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE". When the display mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" depicting a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the word "FEVERZONE" is displayed in the center of the screen.

In this embodiment, the period from when the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) until a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) have been played, or until the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game games have been played, is referred to as the first period. In addition, the period from when the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state until a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) have been played without the jackpot game state being reached (in this example, 51 times or later or 101 times or later) is referred to as the second period.

The period from when the game state transitions to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) until a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) have been played, or until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special game games have been played, is referred to as the first period, just as in the high probability/high base state. On the other hand, the period after the game state transitions to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) have been played without transitioning to a jackpot game state (in this example, the period from 51 times onwards or 101 times onwards, the period after transitioning to a low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (C1), when the first reserved memory count is 0 and the second reserved memory count is 3, the second special pattern variable display is executed. Furthermore, the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015 displays "0", the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays "3", and three second reserved displays 21TM020 are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. Furthermore, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern). In addition, the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern, which is a sub-pattern) is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. In response to the result of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special pattern display being a "miss," the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) combination (in this example, "134") indicating that the result of the display is a "miss" is continuously displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, and the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (C2), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when the first reserved memory count is 0 and the second reserved memory count is 3. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025. In addition, the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern, which is a sub-pattern) is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. In response to the result of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special pattern display being a "miss," the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern) combination (in this example, "134") indicating that the result of the display is a "miss" is continuously displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, and the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In this embodiment, during the period (second period) when the presentation mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", the second hold display 21TM020 is not displayed in the second hold display area 21TM021 even when the second hold memory count is 1 or more. Also, even when the second special symbol changing display is being executed, the active display area 21TM031 does not display the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the decorative symbol changing display (second special symbol changing display), and the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 is not displayed.

This is because in the second period, variable displays (high-speed fluctuations) with extremely short variable display periods are executed continuously until a variable display whose display result is a "jackpot" (variable display based on a variable display pattern for a direct jackpot) is executed. When such high-speed fluctuations are executed continuously, in order to ensure that the player recognizes the display results of each variable display (high-speed fluctuation), it is necessary to draw attention to the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R where the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is being executed. For this reason, in the second period, the pending display and active display are not displayed, so that the player's attention is directed to the display result of the variable display (high-speed fluctuation) currently being executed.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the presentation mode is "Chance Time" (when it is the first period), the hold display and active display may not be displayed, and when the presentation mode is "Fever Zone" (when it is the second period), the hold display and active display may be displayed.

(Game Flow)
11-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of presentation modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the game state are provided, and the presentation control CPU 120 can be controlled to the plurality of presentation modes.

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and the presentation mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started, and if the display result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R variable jackpot", "5R variable jackpot", and "10R variable jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time". Furthermore, if the result of the variable display is either a "3R sure jackpot," a "5R sure jackpot," or a "10R sure jackpot," after the jackpot game state ends, the game state will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (sure jackpot state), and the presentation mode will be controlled to "Chance Time."

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display begins, and if the display result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R variable jackpot", "5R variable jackpot", and "10R variable jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time". Furthermore, if the result of the variable display is either a "3R sure jackpot," a "5R sure jackpot," or a "10R sure jackpot," after the jackpot game state ends, the game state will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (sure jackpot state), and the presentation mode will be controlled to "Chance Time."

When the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display starts, and if the display result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R probability variable jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time". Furthermore, if the result of the variable display is either a "3R sure jackpot," a "5R sure jackpot," or a "10R sure jackpot," after the jackpot game state ends, the game state will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (sure jackpot state), and the presentation mode will be controlled to "Chance Time."

If no jackpot occurs before a predetermined number of variable display display cycles (50 or 100 in this example) have been executed since the game state was controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the presentation mode was controlled to "chance time", the game state will transition from a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) to a low probability/low base state (normal state), and the presentation mode will transition from chance time to normal mode.

Specifically, if the result of the special pattern change display is not any of "3R normal jackpot," "5R normal jackpot," "10R normal jackpot," "3R certainty variable jackpot," "5R certainty variable jackpot," or "10R certainty variable jackpot" by the time the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) (the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time") and the special pattern change display has finished a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), then a suggestion display (in this example, a failure-type continuation challenge display) is executed in response to the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) of change display, suggesting that the game state will transition to a low probability/low base state (or that the game state is a high probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state will be maintained). Then, when the specified number of variable displays (50th or 100th) have finished, the game state falls from a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) to a low probability/low base state (normal state), and the presentation mode becomes normal from the next variable display.

If no jackpot occurs before a predetermined number of variable displays (50 or 100 in this example) have been executed since the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and the presentation mode is controlled to "Chance Time", the high probability/high base state (high probability state) will continue and the presentation mode will transition from "Chance Time" to "FEVERZONE".

Specifically, if the result of the special pattern change display is not any of "3R normal jackpot," "5R normal jackpot," "10R normal jackpot," "3R special jackpot," "5R special jackpot," or "10R special jackpot" by the time the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (special probability state) (the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time") and the special pattern change display has finished a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times), then a suggestion display (in this example, a successful continuation challenge display) is executed in response to the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th) of change display, suggesting that the game state is in a high probability/high base state and that the high probability/high base state will be maintained (or the game state will transition to a low probability/low base state). Even after the specified number of variable displays (50th or 100th) have ended, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) continues, and the presentation mode becomes "FEVERZONE" from the next variable display.

In this way, the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time" from when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) until a predetermined number of special chart games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) are played, or until a jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special chart games are played, the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time". Also, the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time" from when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) until a predetermined number of special chart games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) are played, or until a jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special chart games are played.

That is, after the big win game ends, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the presentation mode is controlled to "Chance Time" in both game states, so a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the common "Chance Time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. With this configuration, it is possible to make the presentation of the first period common when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state) and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state), making it difficult for the player to recognize the game state currently being controlled. Also, even when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (time-saving state), the player is given a sense of expectation that the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state), which can increase the interest of the game when the game state is a low probability/low base state (time-saving state).

(Fluctuation pattern determination)
In addition, ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination tables prepared in advance include a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is a "loss," and a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referenced when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referenced when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) are described. For each gaming state, a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is pre-determined that the variable display result is a "loss" and a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when it is pre-determined that the variable display result is a "jackpot" are prepared in advance.

In the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value for each of the fluctuation patterns of "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)", "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)", "normal reach miss", and "super reach miss".

In this embodiment, the fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" is 1 second, the fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" is 5 seconds, the fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "normal reach miss" is 30 seconds, and the fluctuation display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "super reach miss" is 60 seconds.

The "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" and "non-reach miss (reduced fluctuation)" fluctuation patterns are fluctuation patterns in which a combination of decorative patterns is displayed in a stopped state, indicating that the reach is not achieved after the fluctuation display has started and the fluctuation display result is a "miss". Here, the fluctuation display period when the "non-reach miss (reduced fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern is determined is 5 seconds, whereas the fluctuation display period when the "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern is determined is 1 second. Therefore, if there is a reserved memory, when the "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern is determined, it is possible to consume the reserved memory at a shorter interval than when the "non-reach miss (reduced fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern is determined.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a judgment value for each of the fluctuation patterns of the "direct jackpot", the "normal reach jackpot", and the "super reach jackpot".

In this embodiment, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "straight jackpot", the fluctuation display period is 10 seconds, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation display period is 30 seconds, and if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "super reach jackpot", the fluctuation display period is 60 seconds.

In this embodiment, the "direct jackpot" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result will be a "jackpot" is displayed without reaching a reach after the variation display has started. Since no performance in which a reach is reached is executed, the variation display period when the variation pattern is determined to be a "direct jackpot" is shorter than the variation display period of other variation patterns ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot") that execute a performance in which a reach is reached when the variation display result is a "jackpot".

In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a normal reach ("normal reach miss" and "normal reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described below.

In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("super reach miss" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle presentation is executed as a super reach presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character battle to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won. Then, if the final display result is a "jackpot" (when the jackpot pattern is stopped to be confirmed), a presentation is executed in which the ally character wins against the enemy character, and if the final display result is a "miss" (when the loss pattern is stopped to be confirmed), a presentation is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

Figure 11-6 (A) is a variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation]. This first period [excluding the final variation] refers to the period (i.e., the period of 49 special game after the first special pattern variation display result is "jackpot", or the period of 100 special game after the second special pattern variation display result is "jackpot") excluding the final variation of the first period (in this example, the period of 50 special game after the first special pattern variation display result is "jackpot", or the period of 100 special game after the second special pattern variation display result is "jackpot") from the first period (i.e., the period of 49 special game after the first special pattern variation display result is "jackpot", or the period of 99 special game after the second special pattern variation display result is "jackpot"). Here, in FIG. 11-6(A), FIG. 11-6(A1) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for misses, and FIG. 11-6(A2) is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for big wins.

In other words, when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged as "miss" in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the gaming state is in a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the gaming state is in a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table (Fig. 11-6 (A1)) common to both gaming states. Also, when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged as "jackpot" in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the gaming state is in a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] when the gaming state is in a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table (Fig. 11-6 (A2)) common to both gaming states.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1), in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table, when the setting value is "1", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)", 751 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach miss", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach miss". Also, in any of the cases where the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", as in the case where the setting value is "1", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)", 751 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach miss", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach miss". In this way, in the first period excluding the final fluctuation, if the display result is "miss," the selection ratio for each of the multiple fluctuation patterns is the same regardless of the setting value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, when the setting value is "1", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "direct jackpot", 21 to 50 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "super reach jackpot". Also, in any of the cases where the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", as in the case where the setting value is "1", of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "direct jackpot", 21 to 50 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the "super reach jackpot". In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, if the display result is a "jackpot," the selection ratio for each of the multiple variation patterns is the same regardless of the setting value.

Figure 11-6 (B) is a variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation]. This first period [final variation] refers to the final variation of the first period described above (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special pattern becomes "jackpot", or the 100th special game after the variation display result of the second special pattern becomes "jackpot"). Here, in Figure 11-6 (B), Figure 11-6 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for misses, and Figure 11-6 (B2) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for jackpots.

In other words, when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged as "miss" in the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table (Fig. 11-6 (B1)) common to both gaming states. Also, when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged as "jackpot" in the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and the final fluctuation of the first period when the gaming state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table (Fig. 11-6 (B2)) common to both gaming states.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B1), in the miss variation pattern judgment table, when the setting value is "1", of the range of judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "suggested performance (miss)" variation pattern described below. Also, when the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", of the range of judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "suggested performance (miss)" variation pattern, just as when the setting value is "1". In this way, in the final variation of the first period, if the display result is a "miss", a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the setting value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the "suggested performance (jackpot)" fluctuation pattern. Also, when the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", 1 to 997 of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the "suggested performance (jackpot)" fluctuation pattern, just as when the setting value is "1". In this way, in the final fluctuation of the first period, if the display result is a "jackpot", a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the setting value.

The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (continuation of the high base state of the game state) and notifies whether or not a transition from the first period to the second period will occur (whether or not the high base state of the game state will continue). In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-13 described later, a continuation challenge effect is executed as the suggestive effect.

In the continuation challenge presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-13 described below, the words "continuation challenge" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an operation prompting display 21TM150 for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B, and a character 21TM300 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image that resembles the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image that resembles the push button 31B, and is a display that encourages the player to press the push button 31B.

If the currently controlled game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), when the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed and the player operates the push button 31B, a failed continuation challenge presentation is executed, and the word "Failed" and an object "?" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. The word "Failed" and the object showing "?", which suggest that the continuation challenge presentation has failed, are displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that the game state will transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state).

If the currently controlled game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state), when the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed and the player operates the push button 31B, a successful continuation challenge performance is executed, and the word "SUCCESS" and an object "○" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. The word "SUCCESS" and the object "○" are displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the continuation challenge performance has been successful, thereby informing the player that the continuation challenge performance has been successful and that the game state will continue in a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

Figure 11-6 (C) is a variation pattern determination table for the second period. As mentioned above, this second period refers to the period (in this example, from the 51st or 101st game onwards) after a certain number of special games (in this example, 50 or 100 games) have been played without entering a jackpot game state after the game state has transitioned to a high probability/high base state. Here, in Figure 11-6 (C), Figure 11-6 (C1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for misses, and Figure 11-6 (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for jackpots.

In other words, if the game state is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) during the second period and the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged to be a "miss," the fluctuation pattern will be determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table for "misses" (Fig. 11-6 (C1)). Also, if the game state is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) during the second period and the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged to be a "jackpot," the fluctuation pattern will be determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table for "jackpots" (Fig. 11-6 (C2)). On the other hand, if the game state is in a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), the fluctuation pattern will not be determined based on the fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second period (Figs. 11-6 (C1), (C2)).

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table, when the setting value is "1", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. Also, when the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern, just as when the setting value is "1". In this way, in the second period, when the display result is "miss", a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the setting value.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (C2), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern. Also, when the setting value is "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern, just as when the setting value is "1". In this way, in the second period, when the display result is "jackpot", a common fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the setting value.

(Fluctuation pattern determination table referenced after special chart 1 jackpot)
Fig. 11-7 (A1) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table and the execution timing of each performance when the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is either "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", or "10R normal jackpot" and the game state transitions to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game. Fig. 11-7 (A2) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table and the execution timing of each performance when the result of the variation display of the first special symbol is either "3R variable probability jackpot", "5R variable probability jackpot", or "10R variable probability jackpot" and the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), if the result of the change display of the first special symbol is either a "3R normal jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "10R normal jackpot," the game state will transition to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) after the jackpot game ends.

During the period of 49 special game plays after the result of the first special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final change] shown in Figure 11-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special game after the result of the first special symbol's variable display becomes "jackpot", the variable pattern of the second special symbol's variable display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) is determined based on the variable pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a failed continuation challenge presentation. Then, after the variable display ends, the game state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state).

Next, in the special game from the 51st play onwards after the result of the first special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the first special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-23 and 8-24.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), if the result of the change display of the first special symbol is either a "3R sure jackpot," a "5R sure jackpot," or a "10R sure jackpot," the game state will transition to a high probability/high base state (sure jackpot state) after the jackpot game ends.

During the period of 49 special game plays after the result of the first special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability change state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final change] shown in Figure 11-6 (A).

Next, in the 50th special game after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [final change] shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge performance in a successful mode. And even after the change display ends, the high probability/high base state (high probability state) continues.

Next, in the 51st or subsequent special game after the result of the first special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the second period shown in Figure 11-6 (C).

(Fluctuation pattern determination table referenced after special chart 2 big hit)
Fig. 11-8 (B1) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referenced when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is either "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", or "10R normal jackpot" and the game state transitions to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of each performance. Fig. 11-8 (B2) is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referenced when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is either "3R variable probability jackpot", "5R variable probability jackpot", or "10R variable probability jackpot" and the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the execution timing of each performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B1), if the result of the change display of the second special symbol is either a "3R normal jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "10R normal jackpot," the game state will transition to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) after the jackpot game ends.

During the period of 99 special game plays after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final change] shown in Figure 11-6 (A).

Then, in the 100th special game after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [final change] shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a failed continuation challenge presentation. Then, after the change display ends, the game state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state).

Next, in the special game from 101 onwards after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the first special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-23 and 8-24.

As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B2), if the result of the change in the display of the second special symbol is either a "3R sure jackpot," a "5R sure jackpot," or a "10R sure jackpot," the game state will transition to a high probability/high base state (sure jackpot state) after the jackpot game ends.

During the period of 99 special game plays after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability change state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final change] shown in Figure 11-6 (A).

Then, in the 100th special game after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the first period [final change] shown in FIG. 11-6 (B). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge performance in a successful mode. And even after the change display ends, the high probability/high base state (high probability state) continues.

Next, in the special game from 101 onwards after the result of the second special symbol change display becomes "jackpot", the change pattern of the second special symbol change display executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) is determined based on the change pattern determination table for the second period shown in Figure 11-6 (C).

As shown in Figure 11-6, the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final fluctuation], first period [final fluctuation], and second period) is common regardless of the setting value.

When the fluctuation display result is "miss" during the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the proportion of times that "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which are fluctuation display periods longer than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern, can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses during the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "Miss", the rate at which "Normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(900-751+1)/997} x 100 = 15%], since 751 to 900 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-901+1)/997} x 100 = 10%], since 901 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the proportion of times that "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which are fluctuation patterns with a longer fluctuation display period than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), is selected is [15 + 10 = 25%].

In addition, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the proportion of times that "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which are fluctuation display periods longer than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), are selected as the fluctuation pattern, can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses in the second period (see Figure 11-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the rate at which "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since no judgment value is assigned within the range of 1 to 997 for MR3.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the percentage at which "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which are fluctuation display periods longer than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), are selected as the fluctuation pattern is [15 + 10 = 25%], whereas in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the percentage at which "normal reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which are fluctuation display periods longer than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%]. Thus, in the first period, the proportion of people selecting "normal reach miss" (variable display period of 30 seconds) or "super reach miss" (variable display period of 60 seconds), which are variable display periods longer than "non-reach miss (shortened variation)" (variable display period of 5 seconds), is higher than in the second period.

In addition, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the proportion of times that "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a fluctuation display period that is shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the rate at which "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since no judgment value is assigned within the range of 1 to 997 for MR3.

In addition, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the proportion of times that "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a fluctuation display period that is shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern, can be calculated based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table for the second period (see Figure 11-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the percentage of times that "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-1+1)/997} x 100 = 100%], since 1 to 997 out of the range of MR3's judgment values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)."

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the proportion of "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), being selected as the fluctuation pattern is 0%, whereas in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the proportion of "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), being selected as the fluctuation pattern is 100%. Thus, in the second period, the proportion of "non-reach miss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "non-reach miss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds), being selected is higher than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for each period (first period [excluding final fluctuation], first period [final fluctuation], and second period) is common regardless of the setting value.

When the fluctuation display result is "jackpot" during the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the proportion of times that the "super reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 60 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 30 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern, can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-51+1)/997} x 100 = 95%], since 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot," the proportion of times that the "super reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 60 seconds), which is a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 30 seconds), is selected can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in the second period (see Figure 11-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since none of the judgment values in the range of 1 to 997 for MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach Jackpot".

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "super reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [95%], whereas in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "super reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [0%]. Thus, in the first period, the rate at which "super reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), is selected is higher than in the second period.

In addition, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot," the rate at which a "direct jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 10 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period that is shorter than a "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 30 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "immediate jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(20-1+1)/997} x 100 = 2%], since 1 to 20 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "immediate jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot," the proportion of times that a "direct jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 10 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period that is shorter than a "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period of 30 seconds), is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in the second period (see FIG. 11-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the percentage of times that "immediate jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-1+1)/997} x 100 = 100%], since none of the judgment values in the range of 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "immediate jackpot".

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the proportion of "direct jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 10 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), being selected as the fluctuation pattern is [2%], whereas in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the proportion of "direct jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 10 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), being selected as the fluctuation pattern is [100%]. Thus, in the second period, the proportion of "direct jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 10 seconds), which is a fluctuation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds), being selected is higher than in the first period.

In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period longer than the specified fluctuation display period is selected is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than the specified fluctuation display period is selected is higher than in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game when the game state is in a high probability/high base state.

In addition, in the gaming machine with changeable settings in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in a high probability/high base state, if the setting value is set to a high value (e.g., the setting value is between "4" and "6"), the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the setting value is set to a low value (e.g., the setting value is between "1" and "3"). Therefore, when the setting value is set to a high value, the number of fluctuations required to win the next jackpot is fewer than when the setting value is set to a low value, and the next jackpot is won in a shorter time interval. As a result, the increased possibility of the jackpot occurrence interval becoming excessively short leads to an excessively high level of gambling, creating the problem of not being able to achieve healthy gameplay.

However, in this embodiment, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period longer than the predetermined fluctuation display period is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than in the second period. This makes it possible to make the time interval for winning a jackpot relatively long (not too short) when the gaming state is in a high probability/high base state, even when a high setting value (for example, a setting value of "4" to "6") is set, and it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and achieve healthy gaming.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, if the setting value is set to a low value (e.g., the setting value is between "1" and "3"), the probability of winning a jackpot is lower (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the setting value is set to a high value (e.g., the setting value is between "4" and "6"). Therefore, when the setting value is set to a low value, it takes more times to win the next jackpot than when the setting value is set to a high value, and jackpots are won at long intervals, which creates a problem of reducing interest.

However, in this embodiment, the proportion of variation patterns with a variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period selected in the second period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. This makes it possible to make the time interval for winning a jackpot relatively short (not excessively long) when the gaming state is in a high probability/high base state, even if a low setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "1" to "3"), and thus suppress a decline in interest.

As described above, in this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("super reach miss" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a battle presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character battle to notify the player whether or not a jackpot has been won.

When the fluctuation display result is "miss" during the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the percentage at which "super reach miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses during the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "Miss", the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-901+1)/997} x 100 = 10%], since 901 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern.

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the percentage at which "super reach miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses in the second period (see Figure 11-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the percentage of times that "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since none of the judgment values in the range of 1 to 997 for MR3 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], whereas, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C1), in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [0%]. Thus, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern is selected in the second period. In other words, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which a battle performance is executed is higher than the rate at which a battle performance is executed in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the proportion of times that "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (see Figure 11-6 (A2)).

During the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-51+1)/997} x 100 = 95%], since 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot," the rate at which "super reach jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots in the second period (see FIG. 11-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the percentage of the "Super Reach Jackpot" being selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since none of the judgment values in the range of 1 to 997 for MR3 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A2), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [95%], whereas, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C2), in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "jackpot", the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [0%]. Thus, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which the "Super Reach Jackpot" fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which the "Super Reach Jackpot" fluctuation pattern is selected in the second period. In other words, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which the battle presentation is executed is higher than the rate at which the battle presentation is executed in the second period.

In this way, the execution rate of the battle effects in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the battle effects in the second period. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the jackpot game state. Also, in the second period after the predetermined period (first period) has elapsed from the end of the jackpot game state, the execution rate of the battle effects is lowered, shortening the variable display period, thereby preventing a decrease in interest due to the next jackpot not occurring despite being controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, if the setting value is set to a high value (e.g., the setting value is between "4" and "6"), the probability of winning a jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the setting value is set to a low value (e.g., the setting value is between "1" and "3"). Therefore, when the setting value is set to a high value, the number of fluctuations required to win the next jackpot is fewer than when the setting value is set to a low value, and the next jackpot is won in a short time interval. As a result, the increased possibility of the jackpot occurrence interval becoming excessively short leads to an excessively high level of gambling, creating the problem of not being able to achieve healthy gameplay.

However, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the battle effects in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution rate of the battle effects in the second period. As a result, even if a high setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6") is set, when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach with a longer fluctuation display period than in the second period is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is high, so that the time interval for winning a jackpot can be made relatively long (not too short), preventing excessive gambling, and realizing healthy gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, if the setting value is set to a low value (e.g., the setting value is between "1" and "3"), the probability of winning a jackpot is lower (1/50 to 1/44.5) than when the setting value is set to a high value (e.g., the setting value is between "4" and "6"). Therefore, when the setting value is set to a low value, it takes more times to win the next jackpot than when the setting value is set to a high value, and jackpots are won at long intervals, which creates a problem of reducing interest.

However, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the battle effects in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is higher than the execution rate of the battle effects in the second period. As a result, even if a low setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "1" to "3"), when the game state is in a high probability/high base state, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach with a longer fluctuation display period than in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] is selected is low in the second period, so that the time interval for winning a jackpot can be made relatively short (not excessively long), and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Preview cut-in)
Next, an example of executing a notice performance that predicts the expectation level controlled to a jackpot game state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice performance can be executed as a notice performance. The cut-in notice performance is a notice performance that predicts the expectation level controlled to a jackpot game state. As shown in Figs. 11-12 (2), (3) and (4) described later, when a reach is established on the image display device 5, an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, a cut-in notice performance is executed, and a cut-in image (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) in which the word "chance" is displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than other effects being executed is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, the cut-in preview performance is performed in such a way that the characters displayed in the cut-in image are the word "chance," and the rate at which execution is selected varies depending on the display result (see FIG. 11-10 (B)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be multiple performance modes in which different characters are displayed (such as "chance" and "hot as hell"), and the rate at which each performance mode is selected may vary depending on the display result.

From the player's perspective, when an image related to another effect (such as a reach effect) is being displayed, a cut-in image is suddenly displayed in a display mode with a higher priority than the images related to the other effects (it appears to be in a higher display layer and displayed closer to the player than the images related to the other effects), and the player will be drawn to the changes on the screen when the cut-in advance notice is executed. Also, in the case of a configuration in which multiple effect modes can be executed, the player will be interested in which of the multiple effect modes the cut-in advance notice will be executed in.

(Setting suggestion)
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 receives a setting value designation command for designating a set setting value and executes a performance according to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command. That is, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a setting suggestion performance that suggests a setting value.

In this example, the state of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped is changed according to the specified setting value, thereby executing a first setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value to the player. If the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, no effect image is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped. If the first setting suggestion effect is executed, an effect image is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol is stopped. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the decorative symbol is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (in a state in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that it appears to be closer to the player). In other words, the display priority of the decorative symbol, effect image, and background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is in the following order: background image < effect image < decorative symbol.

The effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the first setting suggestion performance is executed can be in a white, blue, or red form. In this example, when the first setting suggestion performance in the white form is executed, an effect image that emits white light is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, when the first setting suggestion performance in the blue form is executed, an effect image that emits blue light is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and when the first setting suggestion performance in the red form is executed, an effect image that emits red light is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

In this example, when a cut-in preview performance is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the specified setting value, thereby executing a second setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value to the player. When a cut-in preview performance is executed and the second setting suggestion performance is not executed, a normal mode cut-in image is displayed. A normal mode cut-in image is a cut-in image in which the word "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in white letters. When a cut-in preview performance is executed and the second setting suggestion performance is executed, a blue mode or red mode cut-in image is displayed. A blue mode cut-in image is a cut-in image in which the word "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in blue letters, and a red mode cut-in image is a cut-in image in which the word "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in red letters.

(Performance decision process at the start of fluctuation)
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern will be executed and the variable display period and presentation content (reach, super reach, etc.) of the special pattern based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103): a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted, a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot or miss, or the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot), and a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variable display period of the special pattern and the presentation content (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 11-9 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the effects at the start of fluctuation. In this process for determining the effects at the start of fluctuation, the execution status and execution mode of the first setting suggestion effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the second setting suggestion effect are determined. In the following explanation, a state (period) in which the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state) and the first period (50 or less changes from the end of the special chart 1 jackpot, 100 or less changes from the end of the special chart 2 jackpot) may be referred to as "the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period]", and a state (period) in which the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state) and the second period (51 or more changes from the end of the special chart 1 jackpot, 101 or more changes from the end of the special chart 2 jackpot) may be referred to as "the game state is a high probability/high base state (probability change state) [second period]".

The performance control CPU 120 executes this performance determination process at the start of the change in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in Figure 7. Specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the set of commands (pending memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and change pattern designation command) associated with the start of the special pattern change display, it sets a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) for executing the decorative pattern change display corresponding to the special pattern change display based on the display result designation command and the change pattern designation command, and determines the performance to be executed during the decorative pattern change display based on the designated change pattern by the change start performance determination process shown in Figure 11-9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether (i) the game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or (ii) the game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period] (step S21TM1000). If (i) the game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or (ii) the game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), the process proceeds to step S21TM1010 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if (i) the game state is not a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or (ii) the game state is not a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period] (NO in step S21TM1000), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070 and subsequent steps.

When the game state is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period], it means that the game state is in the first period from when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (high probability state) until a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) are played without a jackpot occurring. Also, when the game state is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [second period], it means that the game state is in the second period (in this example, from the 51st or 101st time onwards) after the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state and a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times) are played without a jackpot occurring. When the game state is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period], it means that the game state is in the second period from when the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state until a predetermined number of special game games (in this example, 50 or 100 times onwards) are played without a jackpot occurring.

Next, if (i) the game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), or (ii) the game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion presentation and the presentation mode based on the first setting suggestion presentation execution decision table (see Figure 11-10 (A)) (step S21TM1010), and proceeds to step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(A), in the execution/non-execution decision table for the first setting suggestion effect, a judgment value for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the presentation mode is allocated according to the set setting value. When the set value is "1" or "2" (i.e., when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1" or "2"), it is determined 90% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect will not be executed, 5% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode will be executed, 3% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode will be executed, and 2% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode will be executed. Also, when the set value is "3" or "4" (i.e., when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "3" or "4"), it is determined 90% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect will not be executed, 2% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode will be executed, 5% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode will be executed, and 3% of the time that the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode will be executed. Furthermore, when the setting value is "5" or "6" (i.e., when the setting value specified by the setting value specification command is "5" or "6"), there is a 90% chance that the first setting suggestion presentation will not be executed, there is a 2% chance that the first setting suggestion presentation will be executed in white, there is a 3% chance that the first setting suggestion presentation will be executed in blue, and there is a 5% chance that the first setting suggestion presentation will be executed in red.

In this way, when the setting value is "1" or "2", the presentation mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode (5%), the second highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode (2%). Also, when the setting value is "3" or "4", the presentation mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode (5%), the second highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode (2%). Also, when the setting value is "5" or "6", the presentation mode of the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode (5%), the second highest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode (3%), and the lowest percentage of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode (2%).

In other words, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the same regardless of the setting value (10% in this example), so there is no difference in the settings, but the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect of each presentation mode is executed is such that at low settings (setting values of "1" or "2") the first setting suggestion effect in white is selected more frequently, at medium settings (setting values of "3" or "4") the first setting suggestion effect in blue is selected more frequently, and at high settings (setting values of "5" or "6") the first setting suggestion effect in red is selected more frequently. This means that players will be interested in the presentation mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach Miss" or "Super Reach Big Hit" (step S21TM1020). If the fluctuation pattern is "Super Reach Miss" or "Super Reach Big Hit" (YES in step S21TM1020), it determines whether or not to execute the cut-in preview performance based on the cut-in preview performance execution/non-execution decision table (see FIG. 11-10 (B)) (step S21TM1030), and proceeds to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not "Super Reach Miss" or "Super Reach Big Hit" (NO in step S21TM1020), it ends the processing.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(B), in the cut-in advance notice performance execution/non-execution decision table, a judgment value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in advance notice performance is allocated according to the display result. When the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is an 80% chance that the cut-in advance notice performance will not be executed, and a 20% chance that the cut-in advance notice performance will be executed. On the other hand, when the display result is a "jackpot" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), there is a 40% chance that the cut-in advance notice performance will not be executed, and a 60% chance that the cut-in advance notice performance will be executed. In this way, when the cut-in advance notice performance is executed, the chance of a jackpot is higher than when the cut-in advance notice performance is not executed. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the cut-in advance notice performance will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not to execute a cut-in preview performance (step S21TM1040). If it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview performance (YES in step S21TM1040), it determines whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion performance and the performance mode based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the second setting suggestion performance (see FIG. 11-10 (C)) (step S21TM1050), and ends the process. If it has been decided not to execute a cut-in preview performance (NO in step S21TM1040), it ends the process.

As shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the execution/non-execution decision table for the second setting suggestion effect, a judgment value for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect and the presentation mode is allocated according to the set setting value. When the set value is "1", "3", or "5" (i.e., when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "3", or "5"), it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect 30% of the time, to execute the second setting suggestion effect in blue mode 50% of the time, and to execute the second setting suggestion effect in red mode 20% of the time. Also, when the set value is "2", "4", or "6" (i.e., when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2", "4", or "6"), it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect 30% of the time, to execute the first setting suggestion effect in blue mode 20% of the time, and to execute the first setting suggestion effect in blue mode 50% of the time.

In this way, when the setting value is "1," "3," or "5," the rate at which the second setting suggestion presentation is executed in a blue form is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion presentation is executed in a red form, in relation to the presentation mode of the second setting suggestion presentation when the second setting suggestion presentation is executed. Also, when the setting value is "2," "4," or "6," the rate at which the second setting suggestion presentation is executed in a red form is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion presentation is executed in a blue form, in relation to the presentation mode of the second setting suggestion presentation when the second setting suggestion presentation is executed. That is, the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed is the same regardless of the setting value (30% in this example), so there is no difference in the settings; however, with regard to the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect of each presentation mode is executed, when an odd number is set (the setting value is "1," "3," or "5"), the rate at which the blue version of the second setting suggestion effect is selected is higher than the rate at which the red version of the second setting suggestion effect is selected, and when an even number is set (the setting value is "2," "4," or "6"), the rate at which the blue version of the second setting suggestion effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the red version of the second setting suggestion effect is selected. Therefore, players will be interested in the presentation mode when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

Also, if (i) the gaming state is not a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) and (ii) the gaming state is not a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [first period] (NO in step S21TM1000), (iii) it is determined whether the gaming state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (iii) If the gaming state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), proceed to step S21TM1070. (iii) If the gaming state is not a high probability/high base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process ends.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step S21TM1070). If the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (YES in step S21TM1070), it determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion presentation and the presentation mode based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the first setting suggestion presentation (see FIG. 11-10 (A)) (step S21TM1080), and ends the process. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is not a "jackpot" (NO in step S21TM1070), it ends the process.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period], it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for each change display regardless of the change display result. On the other hand, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S21TM1020) only when the change display result is "jackpot" (YES in step S21TM1070). That is, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period], it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final change of the second period in which the change display result is "jackpot".

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the set value, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is 10% (see FIG. 11-10 (A)). As described above, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result, so the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variable display of the second period, so in the second period, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect up to the variable display one before the final variable display in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is 0%, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for the final variable display in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is 10%.

For example, when the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a "probable jackpot," if the game state transitions to a high probability/high base state (probable jackpot state) after the end of the jackpot game and the jackpot game state does not occur until 100 special symbol games have been played, then the first period will be 100 times, and during this first period (100 spins), a determination is made for each variable display as to whether or not the first setting suggestion display will be executed, and the probability that the first setting suggestion display will be executed is [{1-(90/100)^100} x 100 = 99.9%]. On the other hand, when the result of the display of the second special symbol is a "high probability jackpot," in the second period (after the 101st time) after 100 special symbol games have been played without entering a jackpot game state, a determination is made as to whether or not the first setting suggestion effect will be executed only in the final change of the second period in which the display result is a "high probability jackpot." Therefore, regardless of the number of rotations in the final change of the second period, the probability of the first setting suggestion effect being executed is [(10/100) x 100 = 10%]. In this way, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period, so that the interest in the game can be increased during the period in which the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1010, and whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1050. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is a high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S21TM1080. In this way, two types of setting suggestion effects, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect, are executed in the first period, and only one type of setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion effect, is executed in the second period, so that the interest in the game can be increased during the period when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

Also, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", as shown in Figure 11-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [{(997-901+1)/997} x 100 = 10%], since 901 to 997 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is "miss", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C1), in the second period, the rate at which "Super Reach Miss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since none of the judgment values out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the "Super Reach Miss" fluctuation pattern. In other words, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a super reach in the first period ("super reach miss") is higher than the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a super reach in the second period ("super reach miss").

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A2), when the variation display result is "jackpot", in the first period [excluding the final variation], the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" is selected as the variation pattern is [{(997-51+1)/997} x 100 = 95%], since 51 to 997 of the range of judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach Jackpot". On the other hand, when the variation display result is "jackpot" in the second period, the rate at which "Super Reach Jackpot" is selected as the variation pattern is [(0/997) x 100 = 0%], since none of the judgment values of MR3 from 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "Super Reach Jackpot". In other words, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a super reach ("Super Reach Jackpot") in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a super reach ("Super Reach Jackpot") in the second period.

Also, as mentioned above, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. In this way, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern accompanying the super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot") differs between the first and second periods, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs between the first and second periods, so that it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the period when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

(Example of the first setting suggestion)
Next, a specific example of the first setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to Figures 11-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). Figures 11-11 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in white is executed in the first period, and Figures 11-11 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in blue is executed in the second period.

(First setting suggestion for the first period)
As shown in Fig. 11-11 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period], the presentation mode is controlled to chance time by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern, and the words "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special pattern, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and executes the variable display of the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, and continues to display a stopped combination of first small patterns (in this example, ``417'') indicating that the variable display result is a ``miss'' in response to the result of the variable display of the first special pattern executed previously (most recently executed) being a ``miss.''

Since the first pending memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and since the second pending memory count is 4, it displays "4" in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 21TM021 displays four second pending displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion presentation in white, and causes the decorative symbol "2" to be frozen in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" to be frozen in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "5" to be frozen in the symbol display area 5R, while displaying the effect image 21TM100A glowing white in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. When the first setting suggestion presentation is executed, the decorative symbols are displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (in a display layer higher than the effect image and superimposed so that they appear to be in front when viewed from the player). In other words, when the first setting suggestion presentation is executed, the display priority of the decorative symbols, effect image, and background image is in the following order: background image < effect image < decorative symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the second small symbol in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 erases the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to end the first setting suggestion performance, and fixes and stops the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R, as well as fixes and stops the second small symbol "2" in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "5" in the second small symbol display area 5r2.

(First setting suggestion for the second period)
As shown in Fig. 11-11 (B1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) [second period], the presentation mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE" by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern, and the word "FEVERZONE" is displayed in the center of the screen. When the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special pattern, the performance control CPU 120 is executing the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and is executing the variable display of the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, and is continuously and stopped displaying the first small pattern combination (in this example, ``417'') indicating that the variable display result is a ``miss'' in response to the result of the variable display of the first special pattern executed previously (most recently executed) being a ``miss'' in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5.

Since the first pending memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and since the second pending memory count is 4, it displays "4" in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 21TM021 displays four second pending displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), when the display of the decorative symbols ends and the display result becomes "jackpot", the presentation control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggestion presentation in blue, and causes the decorative symbol "7" to be statically displayed in symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" to be statically displayed in symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" to be statically displayed in symbol display area 5R, while displaying the effect image 21TM100B glowing blue in each of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When the first setting suggestion presentation is executed, the decorative symbols are displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (in a display layer higher than the effect image and superimposed so that they appear to be closer to the player). In other words, when the first setting suggestion presentation is executed, the display priority of the decorative symbols, effect image, and background image is in the following order: background image < effect image < decorative symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the variable second small symbol in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 erases the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R to end the first setting suggestion performance, and fixes and stops the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" in the symbol display area 5R, as well as fixes and stops the second small symbol "7" in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "7" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "7" in the second small symbol display area 5r2.

(Specific examples of second setting suggestion effects)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 11-12 (1) to (4). Fig. 11-12 (1), (2), and (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when a cut-in advance notice effect is executed and a second setting suggestion effect is not executed, and Fig. 11-12 (1), (2), and (4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when a cut-in advance notice effect is executed and a second setting suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12 (1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) [first period], the presentation mode is controlled to chance time by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the words "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, and continues to display the combination of first small symbols ("417" in this example) that indicates that the variable display result is a "miss" in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, in response to the result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) being a "miss".

Since the first pending memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and since the second pending memory count is 4, it displays "4" in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, the active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second pending display area 21TM021 displays four second pending displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (2), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established, the performance control CPU 120 freezes and displays the "5" decorative pattern in the pattern display area 5L and pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5 to enter the reach state, and displays the word "Reach!!" at the top of the image display device 5. At this time, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 continue to display the second small pattern. That is, the first small pattern is continuously displayed without being frozen in the first small pattern display area 5l1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5L where the decorative pattern is frozen, and in the first small pattern display area 5r1 corresponding to the pattern display area 5R where the decorative pattern is frozen.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, while maintaining the reach state, displays an operation prompting display 21TM150 in the center of the screen to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image that imitates the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image that imitates the push button 31B, and is a display that prompts the player to press the push button 31B. Because the operation prompting display 21TM150 is an image that has a higher display priority (has a higher display layer) than the background image and decorative symbols, it appears to the player to be displayed in front of the background image and decorative symbols.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a cut-in preview presentation in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed. Here, if it has been determined in the presentation determination process at the time of fluctuation start that the cut-in preview presentation should be executed but the second setting suggestion presentation should not be executed, the cut-in preview presentation is executed but the second setting suggestion presentation is not executed. On the other hand, if it has been determined that the cut-in preview presentation should be executed and the second setting suggestion presentation should be executed, the second setting suggestion presentation is executed together with the cut-in preview presentation.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a cut-in advance notice presentation in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed, but does not execute a second setting suggestion presentation. In this example, a normal cut-in image 21TM200A (a cut-in image with the word "Chance" displayed in white letters) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode with a higher priority than other presentations currently being executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (4), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a cut-in advance notice presentation and a second setting suggestion presentation in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed. In this example, a red cut-in image 21TM200B (a cut-in image displaying the word "Chance" in red letters) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode with a higher priority than other presentations currently being executed.

(Specific examples of continuous challenge production)
Next, a specific example of the continuation challenge presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 11-13 (1) to (7). Fig. 11-13 (1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when a continuation challenge presentation in a failed mode is executed, and Fig. 11-13 (1) and (5) to (7) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when a continuation challenge presentation in a successful mode is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-13(1), when the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes "jackpot", or the 100th special game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "jackpot") is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a continuation challenge performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the words "continuation challenge" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B, and displays the character 21TM300 in the lower right of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image imitating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image imitating the push button 31B, and is a display that prompts the player to press the push button 31B.

When the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "417") indicating that the variable display result is a "miss" is displayed in response to the result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed previously (most recently executed) being a "miss".

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and since the second reserved memory number is 4, it displays "4" in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. In addition, during the period when the continuous challenge performance is being performed, the display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is not performed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the reserved display (first reserved display 21TM010, second reserved display 21TM020) is not displayed in the reserved display area (first reserved display area 21TM011, second reserved display area 21TM021). In addition, the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 and the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the currently being performed variable display are not displayed.

In response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed, in Figures 11-13 (2) to (4), a failure-mode continuation challenge presentation is executed based on the fact that the currently controlled game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state).

When the currently controlled game state is a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (2), in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a failure-mode continuation challenge presentation, displays the word "Failed" and a "?" object in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character 21TM300A in the lower right corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (3), when the CPU 103 finishes displaying the varying second special symbols, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) indicating that the display result is a "miss" (in this example, "245") in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (4), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), the presentation mode is controlled to the normal mode by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "417") indicating that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was a "miss" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the combination of first small symbols (in this example, "417") indicating that the variable display result of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was a "miss" is continuously displayed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, the combination of second small symbols (in this example, "245") indicating that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was a "miss" is continuously displayed.

Since the first pending memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first pending memory count special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and since the second pending memory count is 0, it displays "0" in the second pending memory count special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5. Also, since there is no variable display currently being executed in the active display area 21TM031, no active display is displayed.

On the other hand, in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed, in Figures 11-13 (5) to (7), a continuation challenge presentation for a successful mode is executed based on the fact that the currently controlled game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state).

When the currently controlled game state is a high probability/high base state (high probability state), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (5), in response to the player operating the push button 31B while the operation prompt display 21TM150 is displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge presentation for success, displays the word "Success" and an object called a "circle" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the character 21TM300B in the lower right corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (6), when the CPU 103 finishes displaying the varying second special symbols, the performance control CPU 120 fixes and stops the combination of second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) indicating that the display result is a "miss" (in this example, "245") in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (7), when the game state is continuously controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state), the presentation mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE" by the presentation control CPU 120. When the presentation mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the word "FEVERZONE" is displayed in the center of the screen. In the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, in response to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display result of the second special pattern being a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stops and confirms the combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "245") indicating that the variable display result is a "miss", and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2, in response to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display result of the second special pattern being a "miss", the CPU 120 continues to stop and display the combination of second small patterns (in this example, "245") indicating that the variable display result is a "miss", and in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, in response to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display result of the first special pattern being a "miss", the CPU 120 continues to stop and display the combination of first small patterns (in this example, "417") indicating that the variable display result is a "miss". In addition, because the first reserved memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and because the second reserved memory count is 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays "0" in the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, at the final change of the first period (in this example, the 50th special game after the first special symbol change display result is "jackpot", or the 100th special game after the second special symbol change display result is "jackpot"), the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuation challenge effect as a suggestion effect suggesting a transition from the first period to the second period (continuation of the high base state). With this configuration, even if the game state is controlled to either a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) or a high probability/high base state (probability change state), the player can play with anticipation of a transition to the second period until the final change of the first period when the continuation challenge effect is executed.

(Other forms)
In the gaming machine capable of changing the setting value described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously in parallel. In addition, the gaming machine capable of changing the setting value may be a gaming state different from the big win gaming state and controllable to a small win gaming state advantageous to the player. For example, in the small win gaming state, the gaming ball can win a special variable winning ball device different from both the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second start winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the big winning hole. In addition, the gaming machine capable of changing the setting value may be a gaming machine capable of being controlled to a state in which the frequency of small wins occurring is increased (for example, the KT state described later).

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided downstream of the variable winning ball device in the right game area. When the variable winning ball device is in an open state, the frequency (proportion) of game balls flowing into the downstream special variable winning ball device in an open state is extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in a closed state, the frequency (proportion) of game balls flowing into the downstream special variable winning ball device in an open state is high. According to this configuration, in a high base state in which the variable winning ball device is open for a long period (or the opening frequency is high), the frequency (proportion) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device in an open state is low even when a right hit is performed, but in a low base state in which the variable winning ball device is open for a short period (or the opening frequency is low), the frequency (proportion) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device in an open state when a right hit is performed is high.

For example, the game state may be a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states: a first KT state and a second KT state. The game state may be controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a low probability state and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state: time-saving state), a high probability state and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state: special chance state), or a high probability state and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state: small win rush state).

In the first KT state, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins in the downstream special variable winning ball device (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled to a state where small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is long. In addition, in the second KT state, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device. Specifically, in the second KT state, the state is controlled to a state where small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is short.

The KT state is also a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability of a normal win and the variable winning ball device being in an open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And since the system is configured so that the rate at which a small win is determined to be when the first special symbol changes is low, whereas the rate at which a small win is determined to be when the second special symbol changes is high, the KT state is a gaming state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small wins occur frequently, mainly by changing the second special symbol, making it a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In this way, by controlling the game state to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state), it is controlled to a state where small wins are more likely to occur, and by controlling it to a low base state and shortening the opening time of the variable winning ball device, it becomes easier for game balls to win in the special variable winning ball device. With this configuration, it is possible to control to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) that is different from the high probability/high base state (high probability state) as a high probability state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the interest of playing in the high probability state.

(Other Modifications)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine>
In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which once the game is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until the next jackpot occurs, but the invention is not limited to this form. It is also possible to make it so that the game state changes from the high probability/high base state to a high probability/second KT state (small jackpot RUSH state) before the next jackpot occurs, at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the end of a jackpot game.

For example, if the state transitions to high probability/first KT state (probability change state) after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability/first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 100 fluctuation displays are completed. If the 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, the state transitions to high probability/second KT state (small jackpot rush state) from the 101st fluctuation display, and the high probability/second KT state (small jackpot rush state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. On the other hand, if the state transitions to low probability/first KT state (time-saving state) after the end of a jackpot game, the low probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 100 fluctuation displays are completed, but the state transitions to low probability/non-KT state (normal state) from the 101st fluctuation display. For the player, whether or not they can get through 100 variable displays without falling back to the normal state will have a big impact on their future advantage, so gaming machines that use this type of configuration are called reverse breakthrough small win rush machines.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small win rush machine, there is a first period from the end of the big win game (from the time when it is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (high probability state) or the low probability/first KT state (time-saving state)) until the 100th fluctuation display ends, and a second period from the 101st fluctuation display until the next big win occurs. In this first period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period longer than a predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 10 seconds or more) is selected is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than the predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 3 seconds) is selected is higher than in the first period.

In the first period of this example, a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image in either game state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state) or low probability/first KT state (time-saving state)) that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, making it difficult for the player to understand which game state they are controlled to in the first period. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, the game transitions to the high probability/first KT state (high probability state), and if the next jackpot does not occur after 100 variable displays, the 100th variable display executes the continuation challenge presentation of the successful mode described above, and the 101st variable display transitions to the high probability/second KT state (small jackpot rush state). Also, after the big win game ends, the game will transition to a low probability/first KT state (time-saving state), and if the next big win does not occur within 100 fluctuation displays, the game will execute the failure mode continuation challenge presentation described above within the 100th fluctuation display, and transition to a low probability/non-KT state (normal state) from the 101st fluctuation display.

In this way, when the game state is in a high probability/first KT state (high probability state), it is possible to transition the game state to a high probability/second KT state (small win rush state) in response to a predetermined number of variable displays being executed before the next big win occurs, thereby increasing the interest in the game in the high probability/first KT state (high probability state). Also, by executing a continuation challenge presentation when a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

For example, when the high probability/first KT state (probability change state) is entered after the end of a big win game, the high probability/first KT state (probability change state) may be maintained until the next big win occurs or the number of small wins reaches 50. If the number of small wins reaches 50 without the next big win occurring, the variable display after the end of the 50th small win game may be entered into the high probability/second KT state (small win rush state), and the high probability/second KT state (small win rush state) may be maintained until the next big win occurs. On the other hand, when the low probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is entered after the end of a big win game, the low probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the next big win occurs or the number of small wins reaches 50, but the low probability/non-KT state (normal state) is entered after the end of the 50th small win game.

In other words, there is a first period from the end of the jackpot game (from being controlled to high probability/first KT state (high probability state) or low probability/first KT state) until the 50th small jackpot occurs, and a second period from the end of the 50th small jackpot game until the next jackpot occurs. In the first period in this example, a common "evening image" is displayed as the background image in either game state (high probability/first KT state (high probability state) or low probability/first KT state (time-saving state)) that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, making it difficult for the player to know which game state they are controlled to in the first period. Here, after the end of the big win game, the state transitions to a high probability/first KT state (probability change state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variable display until the number of small wins reaches 50, the above-mentioned success mode continuation challenge performance is executed in the variable display where the number of small wins has been 50, and the next and subsequent variable displays after the number of small wins has been 50 transition to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). Also, after the end of the big win game, the state transitions to a low probability/first KT state (time-saving state), and if the next big win does not occur in the variable display until the number of small wins has been 50, the above-mentioned failure mode continuation challenge performance is executed in the variable display where the number of small wins has been 50, and the next and subsequent variable displays after the number of small wins has been 50 transition to a low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the game state is in a high probability/first KT state (high probability state), it is possible to transition the game state to a high probability/second KT state (small prize rush state) in response to the occurrence of a predetermined number of small prizes before the next big prize occurs, thereby increasing the interest in the game in the high probability/first KT state (high probability state). Also, by executing a continuation challenge presentation when the variable display is displayed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to increase the interest in the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

(2) <Type 1/Type 2 Mixer>
In a gaming machine of the first type, a jackpot is determined based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won. In a gaming machine of the second type (wing), an opening and closing prize-winning device having an opening and closing wing role is provided, and a jackpot game is executed when a game ball enters the inside of the opening and closing prize-winning device and enters a specific area (V prize-winning hole) provided inside the opening and closing prize-winning device. There is also a gaming machine of the first type and the second type (wing), which is called a type 1/2 mixed machine.

For example, in a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, a jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a game ball enters the first start winning hole), and if a jackpot is won, the result of the change in the display of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, and a jackpot game is played. Also, a jackpot determination is made based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a game ball passes through the second start area (gate)), and if a jackpot is won, the result of the change in the display of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol, and a jackpot game is played. Also, if a small jackpot is won, a small jackpot game is played in which a wing role provided in the opening and closing winning device opens and closes, and then if a game ball enters inside the opening and closing winning device while the wing role is open and enters a specific area (V winning hole) provided inside the opening and closing winning device, a jackpot game is played.

In such a type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the player hits from the left in the low base state to cause the game ball to enter the first start winning hole, and as the machine is controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game based on the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the player plays by switching to the right to pass the game ball through the second start area. For example, this high base state (right hit period) continues until the variable display of the second special symbol ends a predetermined number of times (e.g., six times), and if no jackpot occurs within the predetermined number of variable displays of the second special symbol, the game state will transition to the low base state.

Here, in the performance based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the result of the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol for each of the second reserved memories (for example, each of the three second reserved memories) existing at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times starts may all be announced. That is, when the number of second reserved memories is three at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) starts in the high base state, the result of the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of four times is announced in the performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times. Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) ends, three variable displays of the second special symbol will be executed, and for these variable displays of the second special symbol, a variable pattern with an extremely short variable display period (for example, one second) will be specified. In other words, from the player's perspective, the presentation that corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) makes it appear as if the variable display has been executed four times.

In this example of a one-type two-type mixed machine, the first period corresponds to the period from when the game state transitions to the high base state (time-saving state) until a specified number (six) of special game games are played without a jackpot occurring, or until a jackpot occurs before the specified number of special game games are played. Also, the second period corresponds to the period after the game state transitions to the high base state (time-saving state) and a specified number (six) of special game games are played without a jackpot occurring, that is, the period during which the second reserved memory number of special game games are played at the start of the specified number of special game games.

In such a one-type two-type mixer, in the first period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period longer than the predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 10 seconds or more) is selected is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than the predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 1 second) is selected is higher than in the first period.

(3) <Chance of Falling>
There exists a pachinko gaming machine that, when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, executes a probability drop judgment as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a low probability state, and shifts the gaming state to the low probability state based on the result of the probability drop judgment. A pachinko gaming machine 1 that executes such a probability drop judgment is called a probability drop machine.

For example, in a probability change falling machine, when a "probability change jackpot" occurs, the machine is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) after the jackpot game state ends, and a probability change falling judgment is executed when the variable display starts in the high probability/high base state (probability change state). Here, if the display result of the variable display executed in the high probability/high base state (probability change state) does not become a "jackpot" and a probability change falling judgment executed corresponding to the 100th variable display starts, (i) the machine is judged to have "fallen into probability change" in any of the probability change falling judgments executed corresponding to the probability change falling judgment (any of the variable displays from the 1st to the 100th), and the machine is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) from the start of the variable display corresponding to the probability change falling judgment, and is maintained in the low probability/high base state (time-saving state) until the 100th variable display ends, and then is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state). Here, the period from when the game state ends after the big win and the game is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability state) until the 100th variable display is executed without falling back to the normal state and without a big win occurring corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) if none of the probability change fall judgments executed in response to the 100th variable display have determined that "probability change fall has occurred," the state is maintained in a high probability/high base state (probability change state) until at least the 100th variable display ends, and when a probability change fall judgment executed in response to the 101st or subsequent variable display determines that "probability change fall has occurred," the state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) from the start of the variable display corresponding to that probability change fall judgment. Here, the period from the end of the 100th variable display in the high probability/high base state (probability change state) to the fall to the normal state or the occurrence of the next jackpot corresponds to the second period.

In such a probability change falling machine, in the first period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period longer than the predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 10 seconds or more) is selected is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than the predetermined fluctuation display period (e.g., 5 seconds) (e.g., 3 seconds) is selected is higher than in the first period.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the rate at which a variable pattern with a variable display period (e.g., 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (e.g., 5 seconds) is selected in the first period is higher than in the second period, and the rate at which a variable pattern with a variable display period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than a predetermined variable display period (e.g., 5 seconds) is selected in the second period is higher than in the first period, but this is not limited to the above, and periods other than the variable display period may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, the first period may have a pattern determination stop period (e.g., 1.0 second) longer than the predetermined period (e.g., 0.7 seconds), and the second period may have a pattern determination stop period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., 0.7 seconds).

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), an example was given in which the rate at which "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" was selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period was 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and it may be possible for "non-reach miss (high-speed fluctuation)" to be selected as the fluctuation pattern in the first period as well.

For example, if a jackpot type of "2R variable probability jackpot [next time]" is provided in addition to the jackpot types shown in this embodiment (see FIG. 11-3), since there is no 2R normal jackpot, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "2R variable probability jackpot [next time]" and that the game will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the jackpot game ends. If the rate at which a variation pattern with a variable display period (e.g., 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variable display period (e.g., 5 seconds) is selected in the first period that transitions after the end of this "2R variable probability jackpot [next time]" is higher than that of the second period, the interest will decrease due to the long variable display period, even though the player recognizes that the game state is a high probability state (variable probability state) and that this state will continue until the next jackpot. Therefore, in the first period after the end of a jackpot game of a specific jackpot type such as "2R sure jackpot [next time]", for example, a type in which there is no normal jackpot with the same number of rounds and the sure jackpot state will continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the same fluctuation pattern determination table as in the second period. This makes it possible to increase the rate at which the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "not reaching the target (high-speed fluctuation)", and the fluctuation time in the first period can be shortened to prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the selection rate of the variable display period in the first period was made different from the selection rate of the variable display period in the second period. However, the execution rate of the preview performance in the first period may be made different from the execution rate of the preview performance in the second period.

For example, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (reserved display, active display) based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning or the judgment result at the time of the start of the change. Here, the execution rate of the change effect in the first period and the execution rate of the change effect in the second period may be different. By being able to execute the change effect in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / high base state (probability change state). In addition, in the first period, since the change display period is long, it is possible to execute the change effect that requires a certain period at a high rate, and in the second period, since the change display period is short, it is preferable to lower the execution rate of the change effect. As a result, since the period required until the next big hit occurs is long in the first period, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling and realize healthy playability, and by executing the change effect at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the long change display period. In addition, by setting the execution rate of the change effect lower in the second period than in the first period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the change effect being executed at a high rate even when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that it is possible to execute an action effect (for example, an effect in which a character executes an action on a reserved display or an active display) that acts on a corresponding display (a reserved display, an active display) based on the judgment result at the time of the start winning or the judgment result at the time of the start of the fluctuation. Here, the execution rate of the action effect in the first period and the execution rate of the action effect in the second period may be made different. By being able to execute the action effect in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / high base state (probability change state). In addition, in the first period, since the fluctuation display period is long, it is possible to execute the action effect that requires a predetermined period at a high rate, and in the second period, since the fluctuation display period is short, it is preferable to lower the execution rate of the action effect. As a result, since the period required until the next big hit occurs is long in the first period, it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, and to realize healthy playability, and by executing the action effect at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the long fluctuation display period. In addition, by setting the execution rate of the action effects in the second period lower than in the first period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the action effects being executed at a high rate even when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice performance that predicts the jackpot expectancy of a variable display that is not being executed (a variable display whose execution is pending). Here, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice performance in the first period and the execution rate of the pre-reading notice performance in the second period may be different. By being able to execute the pre-reading notice performance in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a high probability/high base state (probability change state). In addition, in the first period, since the variable display period is long, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice performance that requires a certain period of time at a high rate, and in the second period, since the variable display period is short, it is preferable to lower the execution rate of the pre-reading notice performance. As a result, since the period required until the next jackpot occurs is long in the first period, it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling and realize healthy gameplay, and by executing the pre-reading notice performance at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, by setting the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance lower in the second period than in the first period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest caused by the look-ahead preview performance being executed at a high rate even when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time.

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) may be 10% in the first period and 2% in the second period, or conversely, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 2% in the first period and 10% in the second period. In addition, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the number of times of the variable display executed in the second period. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be higher as the number of times of the variable display executed in the second period increases (as the so-called probability of a streak becoming longer). Specifically, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 2% during the period from the end of the jackpot game based on the result of the variable display of the second special pattern to the period of 101 to 150 fluctuations, but the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 5% during the period from the period of 151 to 200 fluctuations, and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be 10% after the 201 fluctuation. This configuration can prevent a decline in interest due to a prolonged period of streak during the streak.

In the above embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting whether the setting is a low setting (1, 2), a medium setting (3, 4), or a high setting (5, 6), and the second setting suggestion effect suggesting whether the setting is an odd setting (1, 3, 5) or an even setting (2, 4, 6) are exemplified as special effects related to setting suggestions, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special effects related to setting suggestions may be effects suggesting that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has not been changed. For example, when the device is controlled to a setting change mode for changing the setting value when the power is turned on, an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed during the subsequent demo display or gameplay (for example, when there is a reserved memory or a special pattern variable display is being executed). Also, when the device is controlled to a setting change mode and the setting value has been changed in response to a setting change operation, an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed during the subsequent demo display or gameplay (for example, when there is a reserved memory or a special pattern variable display is being executed).

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Performance display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
a setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
an interrupt processing execution means for executing an interrupt processing capable of executing a process related to a game;
a normal variable display means for variably displaying normal identification information based on the game medium passing through a predetermined area, and deriving and displaying a display result;
a normal variable display time measuring means for measuring a normal variable display period during which the normal identification information is variably displayed;
A variable means for changing the state between a first state which is advantageous to a player and a second state which is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times in which the variable means is changed from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period during which the variable means changes to the first state;
An advantageous state notification effect execution means capable of executing an advantageous state notification effect for notifying the user that the device is controlled to the advantageous state;
An advantageous state notification timing means for timing an advantageous state notification period during which the advantageous state notification performance is executed;
An external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine;
A storage means capable of storing game information;
an initialization means for initializing the game information stored in the storage means based on an operation of an initialization operation means;
a setting permission state control means capable of controlling the setting permission state to a setting permission state for permitting setting of the setting value,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the gaming machine to the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine starts and before the interrupt process is executed,
After the setting confirmation state is ended, the interrupt process is executed, and after the interrupt process is executed, the gaming machine is not controlled to the setting confirmation state until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
when power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, a game is resumed based on the game information stored in the storage means;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an ON state, the gaming information stored in the storage means is initialized;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an ON state, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting permission state,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state,
when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being timed, and thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted with the restart of the power supply;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is being timed, and thereafter , when the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is not resumed upon resumption of the power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is resumed;
when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is being timed, and thereafter, when power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the change period is restarted with the resumption of power supply;
when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the change period is being timed, and thereafter , when power supply to the gaming machine is started again in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the timekeeping of the change period is not resumed upon resumption of power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timekeeping of the change period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends;
when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being timed, and thereafter, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a state in which the setting operation means is in an OFF state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the time measurement of the advantageous state notification period is restarted with the resumption of the power supply;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the advantageous state notification period is being timed, and thereafter the power supply to the gaming machine is started again in a state in which the setting operation means is in an ON state and the initialization operation means is in an OFF state, the timing of the advantageous state notification period is not resumed upon resumption of the power supply, but is suspended until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the advantageous state notification period is resumed when the setting confirmation state ends,
the external output means is capable of outputting the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state,
The storage means includes:
The game device has at least a predetermined area in which the game information is stored, and a specific area in which setting value data indicating a setting value corresponding to an address higher than the predetermined area is stored,
A region for storing information not used in a game is provided between the predetermined region and the specific region.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images